Tekla Structures

Concrete Components
Reference Guide

Product version 21.1

August 2015

©2015 Tekla Corporation

Contents

1 Concrete Detailing ............................................................................................9

1.1 Seating connections ................................................................................................................ 9
Seating with dowel (75) .............................................................................................................................................. 10
Defining bolt hole dimensions .............................................................................................................................11
Fitting the beam or column (75) ........................................................................................................................12
Defining grout (75, 76) ......................................................................................................................................... 12
Chamfering corbels ................................................................................................................................................ 13
Creating a recess (75, 76) .................................................................................................................................... 13
Defining recess dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 14
Bearing plate position (75, 76) ...........................................................................................................................14
Two-sided seating with dowel (76) ..........................................................................................................................14
Fitting beam or column (76) ............................................................................................................................... 16
Shaping beam ends (76, 78) ................................................................................................................................17
Seating with dowel to flange (77) ............................................................................................................................17
Creating a recess (77, 78) .................................................................................................................................... 19
Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) ....................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Beam and column connections..............................................................................................21
Battering connection (13) ...........................................................................................................................................22
Corbel connection (14) ..................................................................................................................................................23
Corbel connection (14): Picture tab.................................................................................................................... 25
Corbel connection (14): Parts tab........................................................................................................................ 29
Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab.................................................................................................... 30
Column - beam (14)........................................................................................................................................................34
Column - beam (14): Picture tab..........................................................................................................................35
Column - beam (14): Column tab........................................................................................................................ 38
Corbels and recesses (82).............................................................................................................................................. 40
Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab....................................................................40
Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab................................................................................................... 46
Concrete console (110) .................................................................................................................................................46
Concrete console (110): Picture tab .................................................................................................................. 47
Concrete console (110): Parts tab ...................................................................................................................... 51
Concrete console (110): Connection tab ..........................................................................................................52
Concrete console (110): Parameters tab .......................................................................................................... 53
Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab .........................................................................................................55
Concrete console (110): Socket tab ...................................................................................................................57
Concrete console (111) .................................................................................................................................................58
Concrete console (111): Picture tab ...................................................................................................................59
Concrete console (111): Parts tab .......................................................................................................................60
Concrete console (111): Anchor tab .................................................................................................................. 62
Concrete console (111): Anchor rods .................................................................................................................63
Concrete console (111): Socket tab .....................................................................................................................66
Concrete beam-beam (112)...........................................................................................................................................66
Concrete beam-beam (112): Picture tab............................................................................................................ 68
Concrete beam-beam (112): Parts tab................................................................................................................ 78
Concrete beam-beam (112): Anchors tab.......................................................................................................... 80
Concrete beam-beam (112): Parameters tab.................................................................................................... 81

2
 Concrete beam-beam (112): Anchor rods tab...................................................................................................82
Concrete beam-beam (112): Socket tab.............................................................................................................94
1.3 Panels and walls......................................................................................................................95
Wall to wall connection.................................................................................................................................................96
Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab.......................................................................................................... 97
Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab...........................................................................................................98
Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab.......................................................................................................... 98
Wall groove seam detail.............................................................................................................................................. 101
Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab........................................................................................................102
Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab........................................................................................................ 103
Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab........................................................................................................104
Anchor (10)......................................................................................................................................................................106
Anchor (10): Picture tab....................................................................................................................................... 108
Anchor (10): Anchors tab...................................................................................................................................... 110
Anchor (10): Conn profile tab.............................................................................................................................113
Anchor (10): Bolts tab ......................................................................................................................................... 116
Anchor (10): Cuts tab .......................................................................................................................................... 117
Wall wall teeth (12) ................................................................................................................................................... 120
Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab .....................................................................................................................122
Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab .........................................................................................................................124
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab......................................................................................................................125
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab...................................................................................................................126
Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab ......................................................................................................................127
Electric box in wall (84)...............................................................................................................................................128
Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab................................................................................................................ 131
Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab.................................................................................................................... 134
Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab....................................................................................................... 135
Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab................................................................................139
Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab..................................................................................................................... 141
Sandwich And Double Wall........................................................................................................................................ 143
Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab..............................................................................................................145
Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab.......................................................................................... 151
Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab.................................................................................... 154
Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab.................................................................................................... 160
Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab.............................................................................................. 162
Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab...............................................................................................................165
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam...............................................................................................................................166
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab................................................................................................ 168
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab...............................................................................................171
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab...........................................................................................171
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam.................................................................................................................................... 173
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab......................................................................................................175
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Rabbets tab.................................................................................................... 177
Sandwich Wall Window...............................................................................................................................................180
Sandwich Wall Window: Picture tab................................................................................................................ 182
Sandwich Wall Window: Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab.................................. 183
Sandwich Wall Window: Top detail tab...........................................................................................................187
Sandwich Wall Window: Extra foils tab...........................................................................................................191
Sandwich Wall Window: Additional parts tab............................................................................................... 192
Sandwich Wall Window: Connections tab...................................................................................................... 195
1.4 Formwork components.........................................................................................................196
Beam Formwork ............................................................................................................................................................196
Beam Formwork: Beam tab................................................................................................................................. 198
Beam Formwork: Parameters tab.......................................................................................................................200
Column Formwork ........................................................................................................................................................ 201

3
 Column Formwork: Column tab......................................................................................................................... 203
Wall Formwork............................................................................................................................................................... 205
Wall Formwork: Panel tab....................................................................................................................................206
Wall Formwork: Parameters tab.........................................................................................................................208
General Beam Form...................................................................................................................................................... 209
Beam Form: Parameters tab.................................................................................................................................211
General Wall Form ....................................................................................................................................................... 212
Wall Form: Parameters tab.................................................................................................................................. 213
General Clamp ...............................................................................................................................................................215
General Clamp: Parameters tab..........................................................................................................................216
General Clip.....................................................................................................................................................................217
General Clip: Parameters tab...............................................................................................................................217
General Tie.......................................................................................................................................................................218
General Tie: Parameters tab.................................................................................................................................219
General Tie and Clips....................................................................................................................................................220
General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab..............................................................................................................221
1.5 Openings................................................................................................................................222
Hole Generation (32) ...................................................................................................................................................222
Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab..............................................................................................................223
Polygon Hole Generation (33)....................................................................................................................................225
Polygon Hole Generation (33): Parameters tab..............................................................................................225
1.6 Flooring................................................................................................................................. 226
Automatic seam recognition (30) .......................................................................................................................... 227
Seam Applicator.............................................................................................................................................................228
Seam Applicator: Parameters tab...................................................................................................................... 230
Slab generation with polygon plate (61) ..............................................................................................................230
Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Parameters tab .....
232
Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Parts tab ............232
Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Analysis tab........ 232
Slab generation with points (62) ............................................................................................................................233
Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Analysis tab........ 234
Modeling of floor bay (66) ....................................................................................................................................... 235
Examples .................................................................................................................................................................237
Defining slab position ......................................................................................................................................... 240
Defining projection type .....................................................................................................................................241
Defining slab profile properties ........................................................................................................................242
Index list ................................................................................................................................................................. 242
Adjustment type ................................................................................................................................................... 243
Profile/Seam width .............................................................................................................................................. 244
Modeling of slab area (88) ....................................................................................................................................... 244
Defining slab area properties ............................................................................................................................245
Sloping slab drainage................................................................................................................................................... 246
Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab.............................................................................................................248
Hollow Core Opening Tool.......................................................................................................................................... 249
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab.................................................................................................... 250
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab........................................................................................253
Hollow Core Lifting Loops...........................................................................................................................................253
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab................................................................................................254
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab................................................................................256
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab........................................................................................ 256
Floor Tool......................................................................................................................................................................... 257
Floor Tool: Slab properties tab............................................................................................................................258
Floor Tool: Insulation tab..................................................................................................................................... 259
Floor Tool: Bay contour tab................................................................................................................................. 260

4
 Floor Tool: Slab list tab......................................................................................................................................... 260
Floor Layout.....................................................................................................................................................................261
Floor Layout: Layer tab......................................................................................................................................... 263
Floor Layout: General tab.....................................................................................................................................264
Floor Layout: Advanced tab.................................................................................................................................266
Floor Layout: Detailing tab.................................................................................................................................. 267
Floor Layout: User defined tab............................................................................................................................269
Floor Layout: Modifying a floor.......................................................................................................................... 270
Floor Layout CIP Filler.................................................................................................................................................. 284
1.7 Concrete stairs......................................................................................................................285
Concrete stairs (7) .......................................................................................................................................................285
Defining stair properties .................................................................................................................................... 286
Defining stair tolerances ....................................................................................................................................286
Concrete stairs (65) ..................................................................................................................................................... 287
Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab...........................................................................................................................289
Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab...............................................................................................................292
Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab.....................................................................................................................294
Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab......................................................................................................................... 295
Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab.....................................................................................................................298
Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab................................................................................................300
Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab...................................................................................................................301
Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab............................................................................................................................. 302
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) ........................................................................................................................ 302
Defining stairwell properties .............................................................................................................................304
Defining number of floors and height ............................................................................................................304
Defining position ..................................................................................................................................................305
Defining length and width ................................................................................................................................ 305
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95).................................................................................................................................. 306
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Parameters tab............................................................................................309
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Parts tab........................................................................................................310
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Stairs and landings tab............................................................................. 311
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Ridges tab.....................................................................................................313
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Stringers tab................................................................................................ 315
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Anti-skid tab................................................................................................316
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar A tab.......................................................................................................317
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar B tab.......................................................................................................318
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar C tab.......................................................................................................319
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar D tab.......................................................................................................320
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar E tab....................................................................................................... 322
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar F tab....................................................................................................... 323
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar G tab...................................................................................................... 324
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar H tab...................................................................................................... 325
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar I tab........................................................................................................ 326
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar J tab........................................................................................................327
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar K tab.......................................................................................................328
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar L tab....................................................................................................... 329
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh picture tab........................................................................................ 330
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh attributes tab...................................................................................331
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh bars tab............................................................................................. 332
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bottom anchor bars tab........................................................................... 332
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Top anchor bars tab...................................................................................333
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Z anchor bars tab....................................................................................... 334
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Landing end bars tab................................................................................ 335
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Configuration.............................................................................................. 335
1.8 Foundations...........................................................................................................................336

5
 Precast foundation block (1028) ............................................................................................................................ 337
Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab .............................................................................................. 338
Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab .................................................................................................. 340
Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab ............................................................................................ 341
Concrete foundation (1030)....................................................................................................................................... 342
Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab.........................................................................................................345
Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab.............................................................................................................350
Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab....................................................................................................... 351
Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab............................................................................................................. 353
Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab...................................................................................354
Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab....................................................................................................... 357
Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab....................................................................................................... 358

2 Reinforcement............................................................................................... 361
2.1 Reinforcement for foundations ......................................................................................... 361
Strip footing (75) .........................................................................................................................................................361
Strip footing reinforcement properties ..........................................................................................................363
Pile cap reinforcement (76) ......................................................................................................................................364
Pad footing and pile cap shapes ......................................................................................................................365
Bar distribution .....................................................................................................................................................366
Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps ..................................................................................................... 367
Pad footing (77) ...........................................................................................................................................................368
Starter bars ................................................................................................................................................................... 370
Starter bar stirrups ...............................................................................................................................................371
Starter bar location ............................................................................................................................................. 372
2.2 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement ............................................................................ 372
Mesh Bars........................................................................................................................................................................ 373
Mesh Bars: Picture tab..........................................................................................................................................374
Mesh Bars: Detailing tab......................................................................................................................................375
Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab................................................................................................................... 376
Mesh Bars: Splicing tab ..................................................................................................................................... 377
Mesh Bars: Attributes tab.................................................................................................................................... 378
Mesh Bars by Area........................................................................................................................................................ 378
Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab.......................................................................................................................... 380
Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab...................................................................................................................... 382
Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab....................................................................................................384
Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab ......................................................................................................................384
Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab.................................................................................................................... 385
Rebar coupler..................................................................................................................................................................386
Rebar coupler: Parameters tab........................................................................................................................... 387
Rebar coupler: Attributes tab..............................................................................................................................388
Rebar end anchor.......................................................................................................................................................... 389
Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab.................................................................................................................... 390
Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab...................................................................................................................... 392
Split rebar and add coupler........................................................................................................................................ 393
Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab..................................................................................................394
Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab.................................................................................................... 396
Rebar end trimming......................................................................................................................................................397
Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends...................................................................................398
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes................................................................................398
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing attribute files, part mapping and user-
defined attributes (UDAs)............................................................................................................................................399
Slab bars (18)..................................................................................................................................................................401
Slab reinforcement properties ..........................................................................................................................403

6
Slab Reinforcement Tool..............................................................................................................................................404
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab....................................................................................................... 404
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab.......................................................................................................... 406
Beam reinforcement (63) ..........................................................................................................................................407
Beam reinforcement properties ........................................................................................................................410
Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab...............................................................................................410
Double tee reinforcement (64) .................................................................................................................................411
Double tee reinforcement properties ..............................................................................................................412
Beam end reinforcement (79) ..................................................................................................................................414
Beam end reinforcing bars ................................................................................................................................ 416
Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 ..................................................................................................................................416
Vertical U bars 3A and 3B ..................................................................................................................................416
Stirrups 5A and 5B ...............................................................................................................................................417
Corbel reinforcement (81)........................................................................................................................................... 417
Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab.......................................................................................................419
Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs................................. 420
Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab............................................................................................. 421
Round column reinforcement (82) .........................................................................................................................422
Column stirrup properties ..................................................................................................................................424
Column top and bottom reinforcement ........................................................................................................ 425
Rectangular column reinforcement (83)................................................................................................................ 425
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab............................................................................ 428
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab...............................................................................429
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab.............................................................................. 430
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab.................................................................................431
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab.............................................................433
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab.......................................................................435
Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) .......................................................................................................436
Hole creation and reinforcement (85) .................................................................................................................. 439
Reinforcement around holes .............................................................................................................................440
Stirrups at holes ................................................................................................................................................... 441
Braced girder (88)..........................................................................................................................................................442
Braced girder (88): Picture tab........................................................................................................................... 444
Braced girder (88): Parts tab............................................................................................................................... 447
Braced girder (88): Geometry tab...................................................................................................................... 457
Braced girder (88): Double wall tab.................................................................................................................. 459
Braced girder (89) .........................................................................................................................................................461
Braced girder (89): Picture tab........................................................................................................................... 464
Braced girder (89): Parts tab............................................................................................................................... 466
Braced girder (89): Geometry tab...................................................................................................................... 476
Braced girder (89): Double wall tab.................................................................................................................. 478
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) ................................................................................................................480
Mesh generation and overlapping properties .............................................................................................. 482
Wall Panel Reinforcement...........................................................................................................................................485
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Picture tab............................................................................................................ 486
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Reinforcement tab..............................................................................................487
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Opening tab..........................................................................................................488
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Diagonals tab.......................................................................................................489
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Column tab...........................................................................................................490
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Beam tab............................................................................................................... 491
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Additional tab...................................................................................................... 491
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Attributes tab.......................................................................................................491
Multiple Wire Size Mesh............................................................................................................................................. 492
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab........................................................................................... 493
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab.......................................................................493

7
 Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab......................................................................................................... 494
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns.............................................495
Embedded anchors (8) ................................................................................................................................................ 496
Embedded anchors (8): Input tab.......................................................................................................................500
Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab.............................................................................................................504
Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab.....................................................................................................509
Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab.............................................................................................................511
Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab................................................................................................................... 515
Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab................................................................................................................. 519
Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab..........................................................................................................521
Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab....................................................................................................................... 522
Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab................................................................................................... 524
Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab.........................................................................................................526
Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab..................................................................................................... 529
Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab............................................................................................................532
Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab.............................................................................................................. 533
Embedded anchors (8): Bolts...............................................................................................................................534
Embed (1008)..................................................................................................................................................................536
Embed (1008): Picture tab................................................................................................................................... 537
Embed (1008): Top part tab.................................................................................................................................539
Embed (1008): Bottom part tab......................................................................................................................... 540
Embed (1008): Parts tab....................................................................................................................................... 540
Embed (1008): Placement tab.............................................................................................................................541
Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab................................................................................................................... 543
Embed (1008): Advanced tab.............................................................................................................................. 543
Embed (1008): Bolts...............................................................................................................................................544
Continuous Beam Reinforcement............................................................................................................................. 546
2.3 Lifting.................................................................................................................................... 547
Lifting anchor (80) ......................................................................................................................................................548
Lifting anchor properties ................................................................................................................................... 550
Custom components as lifting anchors ......................................................................................................... 551
Creating recesses for lifting anchors ..............................................................................................................552
Anchor properties from file ...............................................................................................................................552

3 Disclaimer.......................................................................................................555

8
1 Concrete Detailing

This section introduces the concrete detailing tools available in Tekla Structures.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Seating connections on page 9
• Beam and column connections on page 21
• Panels and walls on page 95
• Formwork components on page 196
• Openings on page 222
• Flooring on page 226
• Concrete stairs on page 284
• Foundations on page 336

NOTE Precast components can only be applied to precast cast units. They cannot be
applied to cast-in-place cast units.

1.1 Seating connections

Tekla Structures includes several seating connections that you can use to connect concrete
columns and beams using anchor bolts. The seating connection tools are:

Component Description
Seating with dowel (75) on Connects a column and beam using an anchor
page 10 bolt.
Two-sided seating with dowel Connects a column and two beams using
(76) on page 14 anchor bolts.
Seating with dowel to flange Connects the flanges of a beam to a column
(77) on page 17 using anchor bolts.
Two-sided seating with dowel Connects the flanges of two beams to a column
to flange (78) on page 19 using anchor bolts.

Concrete Detailing 9 Seating connections

Seating with dowel (75)
Connects a column and a beam using an anchor bolt.

Parts created
• Anchor bolt
• Nut
• Washer plate
• Bearing plate
• Fittings for beam and column
• Hole for bolt
• Corbel (optional)
• Recess for nut and washer plate (optional)

Where to use

Situation Description
Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt. Washer
plate and nut protrude from the beam.

Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt and a

beveled corbel. Washer plate and nut recessed into the beam.

Concrete Detailing 10 Seating connections

Before you start
Create the following parts:
• Concrete column (round or rectangular profile)
• Concrete beam (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel (75) dialog box to define the following properties:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Position of anchor bolt, bolt hole and Defining bolt hole dimensions on
bearing plate, bolt hole dimensions, page 11
option to fit beam or column, grout
Fitting the beam or column (75) on
type, beam clearance
page 12
Defining grout (75, 76) on page
12
Parts Bearing plate, grout, washer plate, nut, Creating a recess (75, 76) on page
recess, and anchor bolt properties 13
Corbel Option to create corbel, corbel Chamfering corbels on page 12
properties
General General tab
Analysis Information used in structural analysis Analysis tab

Picking order
1. Column
2. Beam

Defining bolt hole dimensions

Enter the following bolt hole dimensions:

Field Description
1 Hole dimension in the direction of the beam
2 The distance from beam center line to hole center and bolt.
3 Hole dimension in the direction perpendicular to the beam.

Concrete Detailing 11 Seating connections

Fitting the beam or column (75)
Select one of the following options to have Tekla Structures fit the column or the beam:

Option Description
Fits the column.
(Default)

Fits the beam.

The beam must be sloped.

Defining grout (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to include and define grout:

Option Description
No grout.
(Default)

Bolt hole grouted. No nut or washer plate.

Bolt hole grouted. Bolt, washer plate, and anchor

bolt protruding.

Concrete Detailing 12 Seating connections

Chamfering corbels
The options for chamfering corbels are:

Option Description
Beveled
(Default)

Straight

Rounded

Creating a recess (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to define if the nut and washer plate are recessed into
the beam:

Option Description
Nut and washer plate on the surface of the
beam.
(Default)

Nut and bolt plate recessed into the beam.

Concrete Detailing 13 Seating connections

Defining recess dimensions
If you choose to recess the nut and washer plate into the beam, enter the following
dimensions to define the recess:

Bearing plate position (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to define the position of the bearing plate:

Option Description
Square with beam.
(Default)

Square with column.

Two-sided seating with dowel (76)

Connects a column and two beams using anchor bolts.

Parts created
• Anchor bolts (2)
• Nuts (2)
• Washer plates (2)
• Bearing plates (2)
• Fittings for beam and column (2)
• Holes for bolts (2)
• Corbels (optional) (2)
• Recesses for washer plate and nut (optional) (2)

Concrete Detailing 14 Seating connections

Where to use

Option Description
Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts and creates
corbels. Nuts and washer plates on the surface of the beams.

Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts. Nuts and

washer plates recessed into the beams. Second beam is sloped,
and is cut to create a gap between the beam and the column.

Before you start

Create the following parts:
• Concrete column (round or rectangular profile)
• Two concrete beams (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (76) dialog box to define the following
properties:

Tab Contents More information

Picture Dimensions defining the position To use the same dimensions for both
beams, set Use the same parameters
of the anchor bolts relative to the
beams and bearing plates. for left and right beams to Yes and
Options to cut and shape the ends enter the dimensions for the left beam
of the beams and to fit column or only.
beams. Shaping beam ends (76, 78) on page
16
Fitting beam or column (76) on page
16

Concrete Detailing 15 Seating connections

 Tab Contents More information
Parts Bearing plate, bolt, nut and anchor
bolt properties
Left beam Left beam is the first beam picked Defining bolt hole dimensions on page
and right is the second. 11
Right beam
Anchor bolt, bolt hole and recess Creating a recess (75, 76) on page 13
properties.
Defining recess dimensions on page 13
Clearance between beam and
column if beam is sloped.
Corbel Option to create corbel, corbel Chamfering corbels on page 12
properties
General General tab
Analysis Information needed for structural Analysis tab
analysis

Picking order
1. Column
2. Beam 1
3. Beam 2
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the connection.

Fitting beam or column (76)

Select one of the following options to fit the beams or the column:

Option Description
Fits column.
(Default)

Fits beam.

Concrete Detailing 16 Seating connections

Shaping beam ends (76, 78)
Select one of the following options to define how the end of the beams are cut and shaped:

Key Options
1 = column
2 = first beam picked
3 = second beam picked

Seating with dowel to flange (77)

Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts and an optional corbel.

Parts created
• Anchor bolts (2)
• Nuts (2)
• Washer plates (2)
• Bearing plate (1)
• Fittings for beam and column
• Holes for bolts (2)
• Corbel (optional)
• Recess for nut and washer plates

Concrete Detailing 17 Seating connections

Where to use

Situation More information

Connects the flanges of a beam to a
column using anchor bolts and a
beveled corbel. Nuts and washer plates
recessed.

Before you start

Create the following parts:
• Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile)
• Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel to flange (77) dialog box to define the following
properties:

Tab Contents More information

Picture Dimensions defining the Defining bolt hole
position of the anchor bolt dimensions on page 11
relative to the beam and
bearing plate, length of
anchor bolt in beam and
column, bolt hole dimensions
and position
Parts Bearing plate, washer plate, Creating a recess (77, 78)
nut and anchor bolt on page 19
properties, option to create
recess, recess properties
Corbel Options to create corbel, Chamfering corbels on page
corbel properties 12
General General tab

Concrete Detailing 18 Seating connections

 Tab Contents More information
Analysis Information needed for Analysis tab
structural analysis

Creating a recess (77, 78)

To cut a recess in the beam web, select the Yes option in the Create recess dropdown list.
Enter the following dimensions to define the recess:

Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78)

Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts and optional corbels.

Parts created
• Anchor bolts (4)
• Nuts (4)
• Washer plates (4)
• Bearing plate (2)
• Fittings for beam and column
• Holes for bolts (4)
• Corbels (2) optional
• Recesses for nut and washer plate (4)

Concrete Detailing 19 Seating connections

Where to use

Situation Description
Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor
bolts.

Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor

bolts and beveled corbels.

Before you start

Create the following parts:
• Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile)
• Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (78) dialog box to define the following
properties:

Tab Contents More information

Picture Dimensions defining the Defining bolt hole dimensions on page
position of the anchor bolts 11
relative to the beam and
Shaping beam ends (76, 78) on page 16
bearing plate, length of anchor
bolts in beam and column,
beam ends
Parts Bearing plate, washer plate,
nut and dowel properties

Concrete Detailing 20 Seating connections

 Tab Contents More information
Left beam Left beam is the first beam Defining bolt hole dimensions on page
picked and right is the second. 11
Right beam
Bolt hole, nut and washer Creating a recess (77, 78) on page 19
plate properties. Option to
create recess, recess
properties.
Left corbel Option to create corbel, corbel Chamfering corbels on page 12
properties
Right corbel
General General tab
Analysis Information needed for Analysis tab
structural analysis

1.2 Beam and column connections

This section introduces components that can be used in concrete connections.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Battering connection (13) on page 21
• Corbel connection (14) on page 23
• Column - beam (14) on page 34
• Corbels and recesses (82) on page 40
• Concrete console (110) on page 46
• Concrete console (111) on page 58
• Concrete beam-beam (112) on page 66

Concrete Detailing 21 Beam and column connections

Battering connection (13)
Use to fit the secondary part, for example, in a custom component, either square to the main
part, or at an angle.

Use for

Situation Description
Secondary is fit square to the
main part.

Secondary is fit to the main part

at an angle.

Before you start

Create two parts.

Concrete Detailing 22 Beam and column connections

Defining properties
To enter the angle and the distance between the parts, go to the Picture tab.
If the part angle makes the gap larger than the value A, then the part is cut at the end.

Selection order
1. Select the main part
2. Select the secondary part.

Corbel connection (14)

Corbel connection (14) connects a beam to a column using a straight, beveled, or rounded
corbel and reinforcing bars or fastening plates.

Objects created
• Corbel
• Bearing plate
• Drainage holes in bearing plate (1 or 2) (optional)
• Reinforcing bars (1 or 2) (optional)
• Bolt plates for reinforcing bars
• Nuts for reinforcing bars
• Recesses for bolt plates and nuts
• Fastening plates (2) (optional)
• Recesses for fastening plates

Use for

Situation Description
Connects a beam to a column using a reinforcing bar and a
beveled corbel.

Concrete Detailing 23 Beam and column connections

 Situation Description
Connects a beam to a column using fastening plates and a
rounded corbel.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (column).
2. Select the secondary part (beam).
The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

Part identification key

Part
1 Bolt plate
2 Nut
3 Bearing plate
4 Corbel
5 Reinforcing bar

Concrete Detailing 24 Beam and column connections

See also
Corbel connection (14): Picture tab on page 25
Corbel connection (14): Parts tab on page 29
Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab on page 30

Corbel connection (14): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the corbel shape and dimensions, beam end shape and
dimensions, and corbel side chamfers in the Corbel connection (14) connection.

When beam sloped, adjust

If the beam in the connection is sloped, define whether the beam or the corbel is cut.
When the beam end is cut, the corbel top stays horizontal. When the corbel is cut, the corbel
top has the same slope as the beam.

Corbel dimensions and shape

Description
Define the gap between the column and the beam.
Define the gap between the corbel and the beam.
Define the vertical corbel dimension.
Define the beveled corbel dimension.
Define the corbel width.

Concrete Detailing 25 Beam and column connections

Option Description
Default
Beveled corbel
AutoDefaults can change this option.

Beveled corbel

Square corbel

Rounded corbel

Concrete Detailing 26 Beam and column connections

Corbel position

Description
Define the horizontal corbel offset.
Define the height of the beam cut.
Define the gap between the corbel and extended beam.

Beam end shape

You can fit the beam end to the column, or you can create a straight beam end.

Option Description Example

Default
Straight beam end
AutoDefaults can
change this option.

Straight beam end

Concrete Detailing 27 Beam and column connections

 Option Description Example
Beam end is fit to the
column based on the
dimensions you define.
Beam can extend
symmetrically on both
sides of the column, or
with different
dimensions.

Corbel thickness

Define the distances from column edges to set the corbel thickness.

Corbel side chamfers

Define whether the corbel sides are chamfered. By default, no chamfers are created.

Concrete Detailing 28 Beam and column connections

Corbel connection (14): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the corbel part properties and dimensions in the Corbel
connection (14) connection.

Corbel parts

Part Description
Bearing plate Define the bearing plate thickness.
Cast unit Define whether cast unit is formed.
Drainage hole Define whether drainage holes for each reinforcing
bar are created in the bearing plate.

Bolt plate Define the bolt plate thickness.

Nut Define the nut thickness.

Option Description Default

Pos_No Define a prefix and a start The default part start number is
number for the part position defined on the Tools -->
number. Options --> Options... -->
Some components have a Components tab.
second row of fields where you
can enter the assembly position
number.
Material Define the material grade. The default material is defined
on the Tools --> Options -->
Options... --> Components tab,
in the Part material field.
Name Define a name that is shown in
drawings and reports.

Concrete Detailing 29 Beam and column connections

Bearing plate dimensions

Description
Define the bearing plate distance from the column edge.
Define the bearing plate distance from the corbel edges.

Nut and bolt plate dimensions

Description
Define the nut width.
Define the bolt plate width.

Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab

Use the Reinforcing bar tab to control the reinforcing bar and fastening plate properties,
and the bolt plate and fastening plate recesses in the Corbel connection (14) connection.

Reinforcing bar properties

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the
reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Bending radius Define the internal radius of the bends in the bar.
Name Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and
reports.

Concrete Detailing 30 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Class Use Class to group reinforcements.
For example, you can display different
reinforcement classes in different colors.
Number of bars Select 1 Dowel to create one reinforcing bar.
Select 2 Dowels to create two reinforcing bars.
Then define the distance between the bars in the
Bar distance field.

Reinforcing bar length

Description
Define the distance between reinforcing bar center line and the
column edge.
Define the vertical length of the reinforcing bar inside the corbel.
Define the length of the reinforcing bar inside the column.

Recess for bolt plate and nut

Description
Define the size of the bolt plate recess in the x direction.
Define the size of the bolt plate recess in the y direction.
Define the size of the nut recess in the y direction.
Define the size of the nut recess in the x direction.

Concrete Detailing 31 Beam and column connections

 Description

Define the reinforcing bar offset.

Reinforcing bar extra length

Description
Define the extra length of the reinforcing bar.
Define the length of the reinforcing bar inside the recess.

Connecting devices
Define the connecting devices that connect the beam and the column.

Option Description
Default
One or two reinforcing bars bent to the same angle as the
corbel bevel
Available for bevel corbels.
AutoDefaults can change this option.
One or two reinforcing bars bent to the same angle as the
corbel bevel
Available for bevel corbels.
One or two reinforcing bars
Default for straight and rounded corbels.

Two fastening plates

Use custom components as fastening plates.

Concrete Detailing 32 Beam and column connections

Recess for fastening plate

Description
Define the depth of column recess.
Define the depth of beam recess.
Define the offset of column recess.
Define the offset of beam recess.
Column Define the height and width of column and beam recess.
recess
Beam
recess

Using custom components as fastening plates

You can use custom components as fastening plates. Use the Column component and Beam
component sections to define the fastening plates in the column and beam.
1. Select the following option in theConnecting devices list:

2. In the Custom list, select Yes.

3. Click the ... button next to the Component field to open the Select component dialog
box.
4. Browse for the custom component you want to use as fastening plate.
The component you select must be a custom part and have two or more input points.
5. Select the component and click OK.

Concrete Detailing 33 Beam and column connections

6. To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved properties file in
the Custom settings field.
7. If the direction or rotation of the fastening plate is not correct, select another option in
the Up direction or Rotation list.

Column - beam (14)

Column - beam (14) creates a connection between a concrete column and a concrete beam
or wall/panel. The orientation of the beam can be horizontal or sloped. Note that the
connection works only with precast parts.

Objects created
• Cuts
• Fittings

Use for

Option Description
Beam end rests on the column.

Beam end rests on the column.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (column).

Concrete Detailing 34 Beam and column connections

2. Select the secondary part (beam/wall/panel).

See also
Column - beam (14): Picture tab on page 35
Column - beam (14): Column tab on page 38

Column - beam (14): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define cut-out shapes and cut-out dimensions of the column and the
beam in Column - beam (14).

Cut-out dimensions

Option Description
Cut-outs of the main part and the
secondary part in the horizontal
direction.
The space between the column and the
beam can be defined at both sides. For
tapered openings you can define how
much the opening is reduced.
Example:

Cut-outs of the main part and the

secondary part in the vertical direction.
The space between the column and the
beam can be defined at both sides. For
tapered openings you can define how
much the opening is reduced.
Example:

Concrete Detailing 35 Beam and column connections

 Option Description

Select the how the opening is reduced.

The options are:
• From beam centerline
• From beam edges

Cut-out shape

Option Description
Cut around the secondary part

Concrete Detailing 36 Beam and column connections

Option Description
Cut-out to the top of the column

Cut-out to the bottom of the column

Concrete Detailing 37 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Full vertical cut-out

No cut-out

Column - beam (14): Column tab

Use the Column tab to define the how the top of the column is modified in Column - beam
(14).

Column extension
You can use the three fields to define the column extension. If all fields are left empty, the
column is extended to its original top level.

Concrete Detailing 38 Beam and column connections

Option Description
1 Column extension in the vertical direction from the beam top.
This field has the highest priority among the three fields (1, 3, 4) for defining the
column extension.
2 Select wether the top of the column is perpendicular or parallel to the beam.
Perpendicular:

Parallel with top of beam:

3 Column extension in the vertical direction.

4 Column extension in the vertical direction from the beam bottom.

Concrete Detailing 39 Beam and column connections

Corbels and recesses (82)
Corbels and recesses (82) adds concrete parts or cuts to a concrete part. You can define the
position, offsets and rotation of the added parts or cuts in several ways.

Objects created
The component can add a maximum of four parts or cuts to a concrete part. The added parts
can be welded to the main part, added as parts and cast units, or as sub-assemblies.

Use for
• Cut-out seams from concrete walls
• Adding concrete support blocks to concrete columns or walls

Selection order
1. Select the main part.
The part or cut is created automatically.

See also
Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab on page 40
Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab on page 45

Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab

Use the Part 1, Part 2, Part 3 or Part 4 tab to create one additional part or cut to the
concrete part in Corbels and recesses (82).

Profile
Select the profile to be added to the concrete part or used for the cut.
Select how the added part is connected to the main part.

Concrete Detailing 40 Beam and column connections

Option Example
No part created

Part is created

Part is created and added to the main part

Concrete Detailing 41 Beam and column connections

Option Example
Part is created and the main part is cut

Main part is cut

Part is created and cast unit is created

Concrete Detailing 42 Beam and column connections

 Option Example
Part is created and welded to the main part

Part is created and welded to the main part, and the main
part is cut

Part is created and added as sub-assembly

Part is created and added as sub-assembly, and the main part

is cut

Offset
Define the offset of the added part from the main part. You can set the offset also for
openings.
By default, the added parts or cuts are created between the end points of the concrete part.

Concrete Detailing 43 Beam and column connections

Create diamond corbel around column
Select whether a diamond corbel is created around the column.
If you create the corbel, you cannot enter any values on the Part 2, Part 3 or Part 4 tabs.

Chamfers
You can chamfer the added parts. You can define the chamfers either as angles or as
dimensions.

Positioning of the parts

Option Description
Select the side where the added parts or cuts are
created.

Select the alignment of the added parts or cuts.

Concrete Detailing 44 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
You can swap the end points of the added parts or cuts.

Select whether the existing cuts should be taken into

account when the added parts are created.

UDAs
Use the Fabricator name, Name, Type, Nomination, Article number and Comment user-
defined attributes (UDAs) to add information for the added parts or cuts.

Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab

You can add or cut more than one part at the same time. To do this, use the tabs Part 2, Part
3 and Part 4.

Concrete Detailing 45 Beam and column connections

Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab
Use the Configuration tab to define the distance in material and whether information needs
to be printed in Corbels and recesses (82).

Use the Print info option to define whether additional colored dummy profiles are placed in
the main part for more clearness. The additional colored profiles can help in the component
orientation.

NOTE The additional profiles have an effect on numbering. The profiles get part numbers
and assembly numbers.

Concrete console (110)

Concrete console (110) creates a connection between a concrete column and a concrete
beam. The beam rests on a console which is attached to the column.

Objects created
• Console
• Neoprene strip
• Steel plate between console and beam
• Anchor rods
• Tubes
• Sockets

Concrete Detailing 46 Beam and column connections

Use for

Situation Description
Console connection between a concrete
column and a concrete beam.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (column).
2. Select the secondary part (beam).
The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

See also
Concrete console (110): Picture tab on page 47
Concrete console (110): Parts tab on page 51
Concrete console (110): Connection tab on page 52
Concrete console (110): Parameters tab on page 53
Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab on page 55
Concrete console (110): Socket tab on page 57

Concrete console (110): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the shape and the dimensions of the console, and the steel
support plates and the neoprene layer in Concrete console (110).

Concrete Detailing 47 Beam and column connections

 Description
1 Shape and dimensions of the concrete console and the steel and neoprene parts.
2 Select how the shape of the secondary
beam is modified if the secondary
beam is sloping.

Concrete Detailing 48 Beam and column connections

 Description

Concrete Detailing 49 Beam and column connections

 Description
3 Console offset. Reference = column
centerline
You can set the reference to be the
main part or the secondary part. If no offset value is
Additionally, the offset distance can applied, the console is
be defined. placed symmetrically
compared to the
column.

Reference = column
left side

Reference = column
right side

Reference = beam
centerline

Reference = beam left

side

Reference = beam
right side

4 Vertical plate offset. Reference = column

centerline
You can set the reference to be the
main part or the secondary part.
Additionally, the offset distance can
be defined.

Concrete Detailing 50 Beam and column connections

 Description
Reference = column
left side

Reference = column
right side

Reference = beam
centerline

Reference = beam left

side

Reference = beam
right side

5 Console tapering.
6 Console width.
If no value is entered, the width is the same as the width of the beam

Concrete console (110): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to define properties for the console, the neoprene layer and the optional
steel plates created in Concrete console (110).

Option Description
Concrete console Prefix and start number for the part position number,
material, name, class and comment for the console.

Concrete Detailing 51 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Console to column Select how the console is attached to the concrete column.
Default is Part Add.
The No action option means that the console is a loose part
and not attached to any other part in the component.
Create console like Select how the console is created.
Default is Contour plate.
Contour plate = the console is created using the Contour
plate command.
Beam = the console is created using the Beam command.
Neoprene Neoprene layer properties.
A neoprene plate for shock absorbing and sound-damping can
be created between the beam and the console.
If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the defined
thickness will be the thickness on the column side.
Neoprene to Select to which part the neoprene layer is attached, and how
the neoprene is attached.
Default is Beam and Weld.
Holes in neoprene Select how the holes in the neoprene part are created.
Default is By bolt.
Diameter of holes in Diameter of the holes in the neoprene part.
neoprene
By default, the hole size in the neoprene part is equal to the
holes in the console.
Enter a value to overwrite this default hole size.
Steel plate horizontal Horizontal steel plate size and properties.
The plate is placed under the neoprene part.
Steel plate vertical Vertical steel plate size and properties.
The plate is placed at the console side.
Add steel plate to the Select how the steel plate is attached to the column.
column by
Default is Weld.

Concrete console (110): Connection tab

Use the Connection tab to define the properties of the anchor rods, nuts and washers and
injection tubes and to select how these parts are connected to the console or the main part
in Concrete console (110).

Concrete Detailing 52 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Anchor rods Anchor rod profile.
Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor rods tab.
Type of reinforcing bars Select the reinforcing bar type.
Anchors to Select to which part the anchor rods are attached, and how the
anchors are attached.
Default is Column and Weld.
Anchors all the same L Select whether the anchor rods have the same length.
Nut Nut profile.
Define the height of the nut on the Anchor rods tab.
Washer Washer profile.
You can define the direction and the rotation for each washer.
Define the thickness of the washer on the Anchor rods tab.
Weld washer and nut to Select whether washers and nuts are welded to the anchors.
anchor
Tube top Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors.
The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.
Tube bottom Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors.
The height of the tubular profile can be modified on the Anchor
rods tab.
Tubes around anchors to Select how the tubes around the anchors are attached to the
beam beam.
Default is Weld.
Tubes all the same L Select whether the tubes have the same length.

Concrete console (110): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define how the column and the beam are cut (skew/square) in
Concrete console (110).

Option Description
Fitting to column Select how the top of the column is fitted.
Default is Perpendicular.
Column cut-out Default.
A full-width cut-out is created.

Concrete Detailing 53 Beam and column connections

Option Description

Column left side cut-out.

Clearance between the column
and the beam can be set.

Column right side cut-out.

Clearance between the column
and the beam can be set.

Both sides cut-out. Clearance

between the column and the
beam can be set on both sides.

Concrete Detailing 54 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Beam end cut-out Square beam end
Use this option when the
beam and the column are
not aligned.
Skewed beam end (according to
main part)

Beam bottom cut-out Square beam bottom

Use this option when the
beam and the column are
not aligned.
Skewed beam bottom (according
to main part)

Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab

Use the Anchor rods tab to define dimensions and position of the anchor rods in Concrete
console (110).

Description
1 Anchor rod length, hole diameter and top offset.
2 Number of anchor rods, distances and edge distances.
3 Anchor rod distribution options.

Concrete Detailing 55 Beam and column connections

 Description
Useful when the beam is not aligned with the column.

4 Select the type of the hole in the beam.

Default is Circular.
If you set the type to Circular, use the two boxes on the left
to define the hole diameter.
If you set the type to Square, use the four boxes on the left to
define the dimensions of the square cut.
5 Height of the tubular profile, nut and washer.
6 Anchor rods and cuts Default.
Anchor rods are
created. Holes for the
anchors are created.

Anchor rods are

created. No holes are
created.

Concrete Detailing 56 Beam and column connections

 Description
Only holes are
created. No anchors
are created.

Only anchor rods are

created. No holes are
created.

Cut-out in the
concrete beam.
Anchor rods are
created. No holes are
created.

Cut-out in the
concrete beam
(parallel to beam).
Anchor rods are
created. No holes are
created.

Concrete console (110): Socket tab

Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they are connected
and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Concrete console (110).

If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchor rods on the Connection tab are
automatically considered as sockets.

Option Description
Create socket Select whether sockets are created and
which parts are included.
Connect socket to prim by Select how the sockets are connected to the
main part.
Connection rod-connector Select the connection method between the
rod and the connecting profile.

Concrete Detailing 57 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Type of reinforcing bars Select the rod type.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the rod. You can enter
an angle in the box on the right.
Connector Properties for the connecting profile and the
rod.
Dowel
Partname component If you want to use a custom part to create
the socket, select the Custom part option in
the Create socket list. Then browse for the
component, and use the list of options to
position the custom part.

Concrete console (111)

Concrete console (111) creates a connection between a concrete column and two secondary
concrete beams. The beams rest on a console which is attached to the column.

Objects created
• Console
• Neoprene strip
• Steel plates
• Anchor rods
• Tubes
• Sockets

Use for

Situation Description
Console connection between a concrete
column and two concrete beams.

Concrete Detailing 58 Beam and column connections

 Situation Description
Console connection between a concrete
column and one concrete beam.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (column).
2. Select the first secondary part (beam).
3. Select the secondary part (beam).
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

See also
Concrete console (111): Picture tab on page 59
Concrete console (111): Parts tab on page 60
Concrete console (111): Anchor tab on page 62
Concrete console (111): Anchor rods on page 63
Concrete console (111): Socket tab on page 65

Concrete console (111): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the shape and the dimensions of the console, and the steel
support plates and the neoprene layer in Concrete console (111).

Concrete Detailing 59 Beam and column connections

Concrete console (111): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to define properties for the console, the neoprene layer and the optional
steel plates created in Concrete console (111).

Option Description
Console width Console thickness, and the prefix and a start number for the
part position number, material, name, class and comment for
the console.
If no value is entered, the width is the same as the width of
the beam.
Console to column Select how the console is attached to the column.
Default is Part Add.
The No action option means that the console is a loose part
and not attached to any other part in the component.
Create console like Select the profile type of the console.
Default is Contour plate.
Contour plate = the console is created using the Contour
plate command.
Beam = the console is created using the Beam command.

Concrete Detailing 60 Beam and column connections

 Option Description

Neoprene Neoprene layer properties.

A neoprene plate for shock absorbing and sound-damping can
be created between the beam and the console.
If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the defined
thickness will be the thickness on the column side.
Neoprene to Select to which part the neoprene layer is attached, and how
the neoprene is attached.
Default is Beam and Weld.
Holes in neoprene Select how the holes in the neoprene part are created.
Default is By bolt.
Diameter of holes in Diameter of the holes in the neoprene part.
neoprene
By default, the hole size in the neoprene part is equal to the
holes in the console.
Enter a value to overwrite this default hole size.
Select if the neoprene layer is split for each beam separately.

Concrete Detailing 61 Beam and column connections

 Option Description

Steel plate horizontal Horizontal steel plate size and properties.

The plate is placed under the neoprene part.
Steel plate vertical Vertical steel plate size and properties.
The plate is placed at the console side.

Add steel plate to the Select how the steel plate is attached to the column.
column by
Default is Weld.

Concrete console (111): Anchor tab

Use the Anchor tab to define the properties of the anchor rods, nuts and washers and
injection tubes and select how these parts are connected to the console or the main part in
Concrete console (111).

Concrete Detailing 62 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Anchor rods Anchor rod profile.
Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor rods tab.
Type of reinforcing bars Select the reinforcing bar type.
Anchors to Select to which part the anchor rods are attached, and how the
anchors are attached.
Default is Column and Weld.
Anchors all the same L Select whether the anchor rods have the same length.
Washer Washer profile.
Define the thickness of the washer on the Anchor rods tab.
Nut Nut profile.
Define the height of the nut on the Anchor rods tab.
Weld washer and nut to Select whether washers and nuts are welded to the anchors.
anchor
Tube top Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors.
The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.
Tube bottom Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors.
The height of the tubular profile can be modified on the Anchor
rods tab.
Tubes around anchors to Select how the tubes around the anchors are attached to the
beam beam.
Default is Weld.
Tubes all the same L Select whether the tubes have the same length.

Concrete console (111): Anchor rods

Use the Anchor rods tab to define dimensions and position of the anchor rods in Concrete
console (111).

Concrete Detailing 63 Beam and column connections

 Description
1 Anchor rod length, hole diameter and top offset.
2 Number of anchor rods, distances and edge distances.
3 Anchor rod distribution options.
Useful when the beam is not aligned with the column.

4 Select the type of the hole in the beam.

Default is Circular.
If you set the type to Circular, use the two boxes on the left
to define the hole diameter.
If you set the type to Square, use the four boxes on the left to
define the dimensions of the square cut.
5 Height of the tubular profile, nut and washer.

Concrete Detailing 64 Beam and column connections

 Description
6 Anchor rods and cuts Default.
Anchor rods are
created. Holes for the
anchors are created.

Anchor rods are

created. No holes are
created.

Only holes are

created. No anchors
are created.

Only anchor rods are

created. No holes are
created.

Cut-out in the
concrete beam.
Anchor rods are
created. No holes are
created.

Concrete Detailing 65 Beam and column connections

Concrete console (111): Socket tab
Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they are connected
and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Concrete console (111).

If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchor rods on the Anchor tab are
automatically considered as sockets.

Option Description
Create socket Select whether sockets are created and
which parts are included.
Connect socket to prim by Select how the sockets are connected to the
main part.
Connection rod-connector Select the connection method between the
rod and the connecting profile.
Type of reinforcing bars Select the rod type.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the sockets. You can
enter an angle in the box on the right.
Connecting profile Properties for the connecting profile and the
rod.
Rod
Partname component If you want to use a custom part to create
the socket, select the Custom part option in
the Create socket list. Then browse for the
component, and use the list of options to
position the custom part.

Concrete beam-beam (112)

Concrete beam - beam (112) creates a connection between a concrete beam and one or
two secondary concrete beams.

Objects created
• Neoprene
• Steel plates
• Anchor rods
• Tubes
• Sockets

Concrete Detailing 66 Beam and column connections

Use for

Situation Description
Connection between
two concrete beams.

Connection between
three concrete
beams.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (beam).
2. Select one or two secondary parts (beam).
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

Concrete Detailing 67 Beam and column connections

Part identification key

Part
Beam

Beam

See also
Concrete beam-beam (112): Picture tab on page 68
Concrete beam-beam (112): Parts tab on page 78
Concrete beam-beam (112): Anchors tab on page 79
Concrete beam-beam (112): Parameters tab on page 81
Concrete beam-beam (112): Anchor rods tab on page 82
Concrete beam-beam (112): Socket tab on page 94

Concrete beam-beam (112): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the part dimensions and the shapes of the parts, and the
recesses in the Concrete beam-beam (112) connection.

Concrete Detailing 68 Beam and column connections

Dimensions

Description Example
1 Define the gap between the main part and
the secondary part on the left and the right
side.

2 Define the vertical gap between the main

part and the secondary part.

Concrete Detailing 69 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
3 Define the length of the neoprene.

4 Define the gap between the neoprene and

the secondary part on the left and the right
side.

5 Define the length of the steel plate.

Concrete Detailing 70 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
6 Define the gap between the steel plate and
the secondary part on the left and the right
side.

Concrete Detailing 71 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
1 Define the distance from the centerline
of the secondary parts to the outer
contour of the main part on the left
side.

2 Define the distance from the centerline

of the secondary parts to the outer
contour of the main part on the right
side.

Concrete Detailing 72 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
3 Define the distance from the edge of
the first secondary part to the
centerline.

4 Define the distance from the edge of

the second secondary part to the
centerline.

Concrete Detailing 73 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
5 Define the depth of the recess in the
main part.

6 Define the depth of the recess in the

secondary part.

Concrete Detailing 74 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
7 Define the width of the recess in the
first secondary part.

8 Define the width of the recess in the

second secondary part.

Concrete Detailing 75 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
9 Define the width of the neoprene.

10 Define the distance from the edge of

the neoprene to the edge of the main
part.

11 Define the distance from the edge of

the neoprene to the edge of the main
part.

Concrete Detailing 76 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
12 Define the width of the steel plate.

13 Define the distance from the edge of

the steel plate to the edge of the main
part.

Concrete Detailing 77 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
14 Define the distance from the edge of
the neoprene to the edge of the main
part.

15 Define the distance from the edge of

the recess in the main part to the edge
of the secondary part.

Concrete beam-beam (112): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the neoprene and steel plate properties and how these parts are
connected in the Concrete beam-beam (112) connection.

Neoprene and steel plate

Option Description
t, b, h Define the neoprene or the steel plate thickness, width and
height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part position
number.

Concrete Detailing 78 Beam and column connections

 Option Description
Material Define the material grade.
Name Define a name for the neoprene or the steel plate.
Class Define the part class number for the neoprene or the steel
plate.
Comment Add a comment for the neoprene or the steel plate.

Neoprene properties
A neoprene plate for absorbing shock and for damping sound can be used between the main
and the secondary parts.

Option Description
Neoprene to Define to which part the neoprene is connected. The
neoprene can also be a loose part.
In the second list, define how the neoprene is
connected to the part.
Holes in Neoprene Define how the holes in the neoprene are created.
Diameter of Holes in Define the diameter of the holes in the neoprene.
Neoprene
Define whether the neoprene is created as one single
plate or as two plates and the edge distance from the
neoprene to the secondary parts.

Steel plate properties

One or two additional steel plates can be used between the main and the secondary parts.

Option Description
Add steel plate to the Define how the steel plate is connected to the main
primary by part.
Negative volume around Define whether there is a negative volume around the
steel plate steel plate.

Concrete Detailing 79 Beam and column connections

Concrete beam-beam (112): Anchors tab
Use the Anchors tab to control the properties of anchor rods, nuts, washers and the top and
bottom tubes in the Concrete beam-beam (112) connection.

Anchor rods, Nut, Washer, Plate, Tube top, Tube bottom

Anchor rods can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Define the length and
number of rods on the Anchor rods tab.
Nuts and washers can be created. Define the height of nuts and washers on the Anchor rods
tab.
Tubes can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Define the height of the
tubular profiles on the Anchor rods tab.

Option Description
t, b, h Define the part thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part position number.
Material Define the material grade.
Name Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number.
Comment Add a comment for the part.

Anchor rods

Anchors to Define to which part the anchor rods are

connected. The anchor rods can also be
loose parts.
In the second list, define how the anchor
rods are connected to the part.
Anchors all the same L Define whether the anchor rods have the
same length.
Type of reinforcing bars Define the type of reinforcing bars.
Bottom section Define the type of profile in the bottom
section.

Washer
Define the position of the washer handles.

Concrete Detailing 80 Beam and column connections

Washer plate
Define the position of the plate handles.

Define whether the washers and nuts are welded to the plates.

Tube top and tube bottom

You can add a tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The tube top starts at
the bottom level of the nut.

Tubes around anchors to beam Define how to connect the tubes to the
beam.
Tubes all the same L Define whether the tubes have the same
length.

Concrete beam-beam (112): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the connecting options in the Concrete beam-beam
(112) connection.

Anchors only in secondary Select whether anchor rods are included

only in the secondary parts.

Concrete Detailing 81 Beam and column connections

Fit secondaries perpendicular to Select how to fit the secondary parts.

Concrete beam-beam (112): Anchor rods tab

Use the Anchor rods tab to control the number, dimensions and position of the anchor rods
and the dimensions of the recesses in the main and secondary parts in the Concrete beam-
beam (112) connection.

Dimensions

Concrete Detailing 82 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
1 Define the size of the
holes in the beam.

2 Define the size of the

recesses in the beam in
both directions.

Concrete Detailing 83 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
3 Define the type of the
holes in the beam.

4 Define the distance

between the top of the
anchor rod and the top
of the beam.

Concrete Detailing 84 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
5 Define the distance
between the bottom of
the recess and the top of
the anchor rod.

6 Define the distance

between the bottom of
the recess in the main
part and the bottom of
the recess in the
secondary part.

Concrete Detailing 85 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
7 Define the distance from
the centerline of the
secondary parts to the
outer contour of the
main part.

Concrete Detailing 86 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
8 Define the width of the
anchor rod hook.

Concrete Detailing 87 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
9 Define the height of the
anchor.

10 Define the angle of the

anchor rod hook.

Concrete Detailing 88 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
11 Define the radius of the
anchor rod hook in the
main part in the vertical
direction.

Concrete Detailing 89 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
12 Define the anchor rod
egde distances from the
main part.

13 Define the number of

anchor rods.
14 Define the anchor rod
spacing.
Use a space to separate
anchor rod spacing
values. Enter a value for
each space between
anchor rods. For
example, if there are 3
anchor rod rows, enter 2
values.

Concrete Detailing 90 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
15 Define the anchor rod
egde distances from the
secondary parts.

16 Define the number of

anchors rods.
17 Define the anchor rod
spacing.
Use a space to separate
anchor rod spacing
values. Enter a value for
each space between
anchor rods. For
example, if there are 3
anchor rod rows, enter 2
values.

Concrete Detailing 91 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
1 Define the distance between
the top side of the top tube and
the top of the part.

2 Define the height of the nut.

Concrete Detailing 92 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
3 Define the height of the washer.

4 Define the distance between

the bottom side of the top tube
and the bottom side of the
recess.

5 Define the distance between

the top side of the bottom tube
and the bottom side of the
recess.

Concrete Detailing 93 Beam and column connections

 Description Example
6 Define the distance between
the bottom side of the bottom
tube and the bottom side of the
part.

Recesses
Define whether anchors and recesses are created.

Option Description
Anchors and recesses

Anchors

Recesses

Concrete beam-beam (112): Socket tab

Use the Socket tab to control the socket properties and how the sockets are connected. If
you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchors on the Anchors rods tab are
automatically considered as sockets in the Concrete beam-beam (112) connection.

Concrete Detailing 94 Beam and column connections

 Sockets

Option Description
Create socket Select whether sockets are created and
which parts are included.
Connect socket to prim by Select how the sockets are connected to the
main part.
Connection rod-connector Select how to connect the rod connector.
Type of reinforcing bars Select the rod type.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the sockets.
In the second list, define the angle of the
sockets.

Connecting profile, Rod

Option Description
t, b, h Define the connecting profile and the rod thickness, width and
height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part position number.
Material Define the material grade for the connecting profile and the rod.
Name Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number for the connecting profile and the
rod.
Comment Add a comment for the connecting profile and the rod.

Partname component

Option Description
Partname If you use a custom component to create the socket, browse for
component the component and use the list of options to position the custom
component.

1.3 Panels and walls

This section introduces components that can be used in concrete panels and walls.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Wall to wall connection on page 96
• Wall groove seam detail on page 101
• Anchor (10) on page 106
• Wall wall teeth (12) on page 120

Concrete Detailing 95 Panels and walls

• Electric box in wall (84) on page 128
• Sandwich And Double Wall on page 143
• Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam on page 166
• Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam on page 173
• Sandwich Wall Window on page 179

Wall to wall connection

Wall to wall connection creates a connection between two precast walls. The connection
can contain a groove with or without additional shear teeth. Additionally, the connection can
create reinforcing bar loops or embeds that work as connectors in the walls.

Objects created
• Groove
• Shear teeth or shear cups
• U bars
• Embeds
• Long bar

Use for

Situation Description
Wall to wall connection with groove, shear
teeth, U bars and a loose bar.

Concrete Detailing 96 Panels and walls

Selection order
1. Select the first wall.
2. Select the second wall.
The connection is created automatically when the second wall is selected.

See also
Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab on page 97
Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab on page 98
Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab on page 98

Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab

Use the Edge shape tab to select the wall framing type in the Wall to wall connection.

Option Description
Wall framing type selection.
Wall framing type selection affects the wall edge shape
options.
You can use the connection in three different modeling
situations:
• end-to-end
• corner
With this option the first selected wall is fitted to align
with the exterior face of the second selected wall.
• tee
Wall edge shape.
Select the edge shape of each wall.
Adjust the free space between two walls.

Wall edge dimensions.

To set the edge shape and dimensions independently for both
walls, use the Use given dimensions option.
To make the edge shape similar in both walls, use the Same
to right side option.

Concrete Detailing 97 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Groove start and end point.
You can define the start point and the end point of the
groove. If you do not enter a value, or enter 0, the groove is
applied at full height of the wall.

Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab

Use the Extra teeth tab to define the properties for additional shear teeth in the Wall to
wall connection.

Option Description
Select whether additional shear teeth or shear cups are
created.
Teeth or cups can be created also when there is no
groove.

Dimensions of a single tooth or cup.

Location of the first tooth or cup in the first wall and in

the second wall, and the spacing between the teeth or
cups.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or
just a single value. When you enter a single value, the
number of teeth or cups is calculated automatically
based on the height of the connection.

Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab

Use the Connectors tab to select the type of connectors created in the Wall to wall
connection.

Concrete Detailing 98 Panels and walls

Connector type
The content of the Connectors tab varies depending on the type of the selected connectors.

Option Description
Connector type.
• No connectors. Only groove with or without shear teeth is
created.
• Connectors are created by using the selected embed
(custom part).
• Connectors are created by adding reinforcing bar loops.
Reinforcing bar loop is formed depending on the wall
framing type.
In addition, the connector can optionally create one or more
long reinforcing bars along the connection.

Embeds and loose rebar

Option Description
Location of the first connector (embed) in the
first wall and in the second wall, and the spacing
between the connectors.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example
10*400, or just a single value, for example
300. When you enter a single value, the number
of connectors is calculated automatically based
on the height of the connection.
You can also define the extended length of the
loose long bar.
Select which embeds (custom parts) are created
in each wall.
If the embed has any saved attributes, select
which attributes are used.
Offset of the embed.
By default, the embed input points are in the
center of the wall.

Concrete Detailing 99 Panels and walls

U bars and loose rebar

Option Description
Location of the first connector (reinforcing bar
loop) in the first wall and in the second wall, and
the spacing between the connectors.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example
10*400, or just a single value, for example
300. When you enter a single value the number
of connectors is calculated automatically based
on the height of the connection.
You can also define the extended length of the
loose long bar.
Reinforcing bar loop dimensions.
The available dimension options depend on the
wall framing type selected on the Edge shape
tab.
Many of the dimensions have counter parts in
the first wall and in the second wall. It is enough
to enter one dimension and by default the
counter part dimension gets the same value.

Number of bars Number of long loose bars.

If you do not want to create a loose long bar,
enter 0 as the Number of bars.

Reinforcing bar properties

Enter the properties for reinforcing bar Grade, Size, Name, Class, Prefix and Start Number.

Customization
If needed, you can create your own embed (custom part) and use it as a connector.

Concrete Detailing 100 Panels and walls

When creating the embed, ensure that the input points are defined so that they are
compatible with Wall to wall connection. The image below shows examples of the input
points.

Wall groove seam detail

Wall groove seam detail creates a groove with optional shear teeth to a precast wall, a slab
or a similar part. Additionally the connection can create reinforcing bar loops or embeds that
work as connectors in the walls.

Objects created
• Groove
• Shear teeth or shear cups
• U bars
• Embeds
• Long bar

Concrete Detailing 101 Panels and walls

Use for

Situation Description
Groove with shear teeth and U bars.

Selection order
1. Select the wall or slab.
2. Pick the start point of the groove.
3. Pick the end point of the groove.

See also
Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab on page 102
Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab on page 103
Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab on page 104

Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab

Use the Edge shape tab to select the orientation of the groove in the Wall groove seam
detail.

Option Description
Groove orientation selection.
Define the orientation of the groove in relation to the input
points.

Concrete Detailing 102 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Groove edge shape.

Groove start and end point in relation to input the points.

You can define the start point and the end point of the
groove. If you do not enter a value, or enter 0, the groove is
applied at full height of the wall.

Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab

Use the Extra teeth tab to define the properties for additional shear teeth in the Wall
groove seam detail.

Option Description
Select whether additional shear teeth or shear cups are
created.
Teeth or cups can be created also when there is no
groove.

Dimensions of a single tooth or cup.

Concrete Detailing 103 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Location of the first tooth or cup in the groove, and the
spacing between the teeth or cups.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example 10*400, or
just a single value. When you enter a single value, the
number of teeth or cups is calculated automatically
based on the height of the detail.

Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab

Use the Connectors tab to select the type of connectors created in the Wall groove seam
detail.

Connector type
The content of the Connectors tab page varies depending on the type of the selected
connectors.

Option Description
Connector type.
• No connectors. Only groove with or without shear
teeth is created.
• Connectors are created by using the selected embed
(custom part).
• Connectors are created by adding reinforcing bar
loops. Reinforcing bar loop is formed depending on
the framing type.
In addition, the connector can optionally create one or
more long reinforcing bars along the connection.

Embeds and loose rebar

Option Description
Location of the first connector (embed) in the
groove, and the spacing between the connectors.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example
10*400, or just a single value, for example
300. When you enter a single value, the number
of connectors is calculated automatically based
on the height of the detail.
You can also define the extended length of the
loose long bar.

Concrete Detailing 104 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Select which embeds (custom parts) are created
in each groove.
If the embed has any saved attributes, select
which attributes are used.
Offset of the embed.
By default, the embed input points are in the
center of the groove.

U bars and loose rebar

Option Description
Location of the first connector (reinforcing
bar loop) in the groove, and the spacing
between the connectors.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example
10*400, or just a single value, for example
300. When you enter a single value, the
number of connectors is calculated
automatically based on the height of the
detail.
You can also define the extended length of
the loose long bar.
Reinforcing bar loop dimensions.
The available dimension options depend on
the orientation of the groove selected on the
Edge shape tab.

Concrete Detailing 105 Panels and walls

 Option Description

Number of bars Number of long loose bars

If you do not want to create a loose long bar,
enter 0 as the Number of bars.

Reinforcing bar properties

Enter the properties for reinforcing bar Grade, Size, Name, Class, Prefix and Start Number.

Customization
If needed, you can create your own custom part (embed) and use it as a connector.
When creating the embed, ensure that the input points are defined so that they are
compatible with Wall groove seam detail. The image below shows examples of the input
points.

Anchor (10)
Anchor (10) connects two precast concrete parts, for example, two panels or a column to a
panel. The precast concrete parts are connected with L profiles and with embedded
connection profiles that act as anchors, for example, custom component bolt anchors or

Concrete Detailing 106 Panels and walls

cast-in channels. The bolt anchors and the cast-in channels can be single-sided or double-
sided. Additionally, seams can be defined between the main part and the secondary parts.

Objects created
• Anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channels)
• L profiles
• Bolts

Use for

Situation Description
Connection with L profiles and bolt anchors.

Connection with L profile and cast-in

channel.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (precast concrete panel or a column).
2. Select the secondary part (precast concrete panel).
The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

Concrete Detailing 107 Panels and walls

See also
Anchor (10): Picture tab on page 108
Anchor (10): Anchors tab on page 110
Anchor (10): Conn profile tab on page 113
Anchor (10): Bolts tab on page 116
Anchor (10): Cuts tab on page 117

Anchor (10): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the number of anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channel
profiles), edge distances and plate embed offset in Anchor (10).

Description Example
1 Horizontal offset of the anchors.
The offset can be defined for both concrete
parts separately.

2 Vertical offset of the anchors.

The offset can be defined for the top and
bottom side.

Concrete Detailing 108 Panels and walls

 Description Example
3 Select how the anchors are distributed.

4 Select which of the anchors are omitted.

Concrete Detailing 109 Panels and walls

 Description Example
5 Connection plate horizontal offset from the
centerline of an anchor.
This option is available only if you have set
the orientation of the connection plate as
follows on the Conn profile tab:

Anchor (10): Anchors tab

Use the Anchors tab to define the properties, position and orientation of the anchors (bolt
anchors or cast-in channel profiles) in Anchor (10).

Concrete Detailing 110 Panels and walls

 Description Example
1 Anchor properties in the main part.

2 Select on which side the anchors are created in

the main part.

3 Select whether a profile from the profile catalog is

used as an anchor, or a custom part from the
Applications and Components catalog.

Concrete Detailing 111 Panels and walls

 Description Example
4 Anchor properties in the secondary part.

5 Select on which side the anchors are created in

the secondary part.
6 Select whether a profile from the profile catalog is
used as an anchor, or a custom part from the
Applications and Components catalog.
7 Select the connection method of the anchor.
• Default (same as Weld to element)
• Weld to element
• Cast unit to element
• Not add to element (bolt anchors or cast-in
channels are loose parts)
• Sub-assembly
8 Position and rotation of the anchors in the main
concrete part.
For the Position in plane and Position in depth
options, an offset can be defined.
9 Orientation of the anchors in the main part.

10 Position and rotation of the anchors in the

secondary concrete part.
For Position in plane and Position in depth
options, an offset can be defined.

Concrete Detailing 112 Panels and walls

 Description Example
11 Orientation of the anchors in the secondary part.

12 Select the cut-out method of the anchors.

Default, no cut

No cut

Cut-out shape is the exact profile

contour of the bolt anchor or the
cast-in channel

Box shape cut-out

Anchor (10): Conn profile tab

Use the Conn profile tab to define the properties and position of the connection L profile in
Anchor (10).

Concrete Detailing 113 Panels and walls

 Description Example
1 Connection profile properties.

2 Select on which side the connection profiles

are created.

3 Select whether a profile from the profile

catalog is used as a connection profile, or a
custom part from the Applications and
Components catalog.

Concrete Detailing 114 Panels and walls

 Description Example
4 Position and rotation of the connection
profiles.
For the Position in plane and Position in
depth options, an offset can be defined.
5 Orientation of the connection profile.

6 Connection profile cuts.

Concrete Detailing 115 Panels and walls

 Description Example
These options are available only if you have
set the orientation of the connection profile
as follows on the Conn profile tab:

7 Select the connection method of the

connection profile.
8 Select the connection profile type.
• Library profile (define the profile using
the L profile options).
• Folded plate (define the dimensions
using the options below).

Anchor (10): Bolts tab

Use the Bolts tab to define the bolt properties and offsets in Anchor (10).

Concrete Detailing 116 Panels and walls

 Description
1 Horizontal bolt distances from the L profile edges.
Default value is half of L profile flange width.
2 Vertical bolt offsets.
Reference is the L profile centerline. Default value is 0 mm.
3 Select how the bolts are added in the main part.
4 Select how the bolts are added in the secondary part.
5 Bolting direction.

Anchor (10): Cuts tab

Use the Cuts tab to define the cuts and the seams in the main and secondary parts in Anchor
(10).

Additionally, the main part can be extended, or the secondary part thickness can be increased
or decreased.
You can create a seam by defining a cut between the main part and the secondary part.

Concrete Detailing 117 Panels and walls

 Description Example
1 Extension of the main part.
If you need to extend the part, enter a
value. Ensure that you have also selected
a cut method from the cut type list. If
you select the No cut option, the part is
not extended.
2 Seam width.
Reference is the L profile centerline.
Default value is 0 mm.
3 Left side cut along the secondary part.
Reference is the part centerline.
Part thickness is decreased.
4 Right side cut along the secondary part.
Reference is the part centerline.
Part thickness is decreased.

5 Cut reference for the main and secondary

parts.

Concrete Detailing 118 Panels and walls

 Description Example
Main part near side

Main part centerline

Main part far side

6 Select the cut type.

Default, no cut

Reference is the main part. Secondary part

will be adjusted to the main part using a
fitting.

Concrete Detailing 119 Panels and walls

 Description Example

Reference is the main part. Secondary part

will be adjusted to the main part using a
line cut.

Reference is main part. Just like previous

options, but the longest part of the panel
will be removed using a line cut.

No cut

Wall wall teeth (12)

Wall wall teeth (12) connects two perpendicular concrete panels with a tooth-shaped
connection. The number of teeth can be set. Injection tubes and connection bars can be
added to the connection. The connection is created with or without seams.

Objects created
• Tooth connection (2 or 3 teeth) between two panels
• Injection tubes
• Connection bars

Concrete Detailing 120 Panels and walls

Use for

Situation Description
2-teeth connection between two panels.
The height of the teeth can be modified and the clearance
between the teeth can be set.

3-teeth connection between two panels with connection

bar.

Tooth connection between two panels with connection

bar and socket.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (concrete panel).

Concrete Detailing 121 Panels and walls

2. Select the secondary part (concrete panel).
The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

See also
Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab on page 122
Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab on page 124
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab on page 125
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab on page 126
Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab on page 127

Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the number of teeth, the height of teeth, and seam widths in
Wall wall teeth (12). Wall wall teeth (12) has two main connection types: A (two teeth)
and B (three teeth).

Concrete Detailing 122 Panels and walls

 Description
1 Select the number and position of teeth.
Standard is A 2 teeth bottom up.

2 Horizontal seam width in the main part. For type A (2-teeth connection).
3 Secondary part tooth height.
Reference is center of the seam. For type A (2-teeth connection).
4 Main part tooth height.
Reference is center of the seam. For type A (2-teeth connection).
This value has an effect only if the secondary part tooth height (3) has no value.
5 Vertical seam width between the teeth. For type A (2-teeth connection).
6 Horizontal seam width in the main part. For type A (2-teeth connection).
7 Top tooth height. For type B (3 teeth connection).
Reference is center of the seam.
If there is no value, and the middle tooth height and the bottom tooth height are
defined, then the top tooth gets the residual height distance.
If none of the tooth heights are defined, then all three teeth get an equal height:
(wall height - seam width) / 3
This value has lowest priority from the three tooth height-defining values.
Example:
Panel height is 1500mm. All three tooth heights are defined:
• Top: 400mm
• Middle: 700mm
• Bottom: 600mm
Total defined height of teeth = 1800mm. Result: top tooth gets height
1500-700-600=200mm
8 Vertical seam width between the teeth. For type B (3-teeth connection).
9 Bottom tooth height.
Reference is center of the seam. For type B (3-teeth connection).
If there is no value, and the top tooth and the middle tooth height are defined, then
the bottom tooth gets the residual height distance.

Concrete Detailing 123 Panels and walls

Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to define the properties and dimensions of injection tubes and connection
bars in Wall wall teeth (12).

Option Description
Injection tubes Injection tube properties.
You can define the placing of the injection tubes separately for
the top tooth, middle tooth and bottom tooth.
1 Select whether an injection tube is created.
Example:

Default is No action.

Concrete Detailing 124 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Top tooth Select whether an injection tube is created in the teeth and
select the connection method.
Middle tooth
Default is Part cut.
Bottom tooth
Connection bar Connection bar properties.
One connection bar can be created through the teeth.
2 Select whether a connection bar is created and the connection
method.
Default is Yes + weld 1.
3 Depth of a connection bar from the top of the top tooth.
Default is 0.
4 Depth of an injection tube from the top of the top tooth.
Default is 0.
5 Depth of a connection bar from the top of the bottom tooth.
Default is top tooth height + seam width. If both values 5
and 7 are defined, then the value in the box 7 overwrites the
value in the box 5.
6 Depth of an injection tube from the bottom of the bottom
tooth.
Default is 0.
7 Depth of a connection bar from the bottom of the bottom
tooth.
If both values 5 and 7 are defined, then the value in the box 7
overwrites the value in the box 5.

Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab

Use the Cut sec tab to define the way the secondary concrete panel is cut in Wall wall teeth
(12).

By default the component creates a 2-teeth connection.

You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut.
If the concrete panels are not perpendicularly orientated, you can define how the secondary
part is fitted to the main part.

Concrete Detailing 125 Panels and walls

Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab
Use the Cut prim tab to define the way the main concrete panel is cut in Wall wall teeth
(12).

You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut.
If the concrete panels are not perpendicularly orientated, you can define how the main part
is fitted to the secondary part.

Concrete Detailing 126 Panels and walls

Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab
Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they are connected
and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Wall wall teeth (12). Sockets are
created only if you have created connection bars.

Option Description
Dimensions for socket anchor, rod profile and
connecting profile.

Create socket Select whether sockets are created and which

parts are included.
Note that a socket is created only if a connection
bar has been created on the Parts tab.
In the examples the red profile is the connection
bar:

Connect socket Select how the sockets are connected to the

main part.
Default is By cast unit.
Connection rod-connector Select the connection method between the rod
and the connecting profile.
Default is Part add conn to rod.
Rod type Select the rod type.
Default is Poly-profile.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the rod. You can enter an
angle in the box on the right.

Concrete Detailing 127 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Default is Front.

Connecting profile Properties for the connecting profile, rod and

bottom section.
Rod
Note that the bottom section is part-added to
Bottom section
the rod automatically.
Example:

Partname component If you want to use a custom part to create the

socket, select the Custom part option in the
Create socket list.
Then browse for the component, and use the list
of options to position the custom part.

Electric box in wall (84)

Electric box in wall (84) creates electric boxes in walls.

Objects created
• Electric boxes
• Tubes

Concrete Detailing 128 Panels and walls

Use for

Situation Description
Electric box in a wall with top
connection.

Electric box in a wall with

bottom connection.

Concrete Detailing 129 Panels and walls

 Situation Description
Electric box in a wall with top
and bottom connections.

Selection order
1. Select a concrete panel.
2. Pick a position for the electric box.
3. Pick a position for the top connection.
4. Pick a position for the bottom connection.
The electric box and connections are created automatically.

Concrete Detailing 130 Panels and walls

Part identification key

Part
Electric box

Panel

See also
Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab on page 131
Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab on page 134
Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab on page 135
Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab on page 139
Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab on page 141

Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the shape, number and position of the tubes and the position
of the electric boxes in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 131 Panels and walls

Tube direction

Option Description
Select the tube shape in the up
direction.

Select the tube shape in the

down direction.

Select the tube direction in

relation to the start point
(yellow) and end point (magenta)
of the wall.

Select the number of tubes in the

up direction.

Concrete Detailing 132 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Select the number of tubes in the
down direction.

Tubes to concrete / Electric parts to concrete

Select how the tubes and the electric parts are connected to the concrete part.

Option Description
As subassembly Add as a subassembly to the concrete part.
By cast unit Add to the concrete part.
Welds Weld to the concrete part.
Not Do not connect to the concrete part.

Tube and electric box positions

Option Description
Select the position of the up connection in
the concrete part.
Select the position of the electric box in the
concrete part.
Select the position of the down connection
in the concrete part.

Concrete Detailing 133 Panels and walls

Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the tube properties at the top and bottom of the concrete part
and the position of the tube reference points in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool.

Tube top / Tube bottom

Option Description Default

t, b, h Define the tube thickness, D19
width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start ET 1
number for the part position
number.
Material Define the material grade. PVC
Name Define a name for the tube. E-tube
Class Define the part class number 2
for the tube.
Comment Add a comment for the tube.

1st reference point

Define a reference point for the tube. The reference point determines the position of the part
mark in a drawing.

Option Description Example

At top Start point is positioned at
the top of the tube.

Concrete Detailing 134 Panels and walls

 Option Description Example
At bottom Start point is positioned at
the bottom of the tube.

At longest Start point is positioned at

segment the longest segment of the
tube.

At smallest Start point is positioned at

segment the smallest segment of the
tube.

Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab

Use the Electric box tab to control the shape, number and dimensions of the electric boxes
and to define a possible connection piece (Tube a) in the Electric box in wall (84).

Concrete Detailing 135 Panels and walls

Electric box / Tube a

Option Description Default

t, b, h Electric box and the D19
connection piece (Tube a)
thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for ET 1
the part position number.
Material Material grade. PVC
Name Name for the electric box E-tube
and the connection piece.
Class Part class number for the 2
electric box and the
connection piece.
Comment Add a comment for the
electric box and the
connection piece.

Rotation
Control the rotation of the electric box and the connection piece.

Option Example
Front

Top

Back

Concrete Detailing 136 Panels and walls

 Option Example
Below

Electric box shape

Option Description
Profiles / Custom part You can use a profile from the profile catalog
or select a custom component from the
Example custom part:
Applications and Components catalog.
If you use a custom component, browse for
the component and use the list of options to
position the custom component.

Select the shape of the electric box and

define the dimensions for the electric box.

Select an extra shape for creating several

different types of electric boxes.
This shape is visible in drawings and it
indicates the front and back side of the
electric box.

Number = Number of electric boxes in horizontal or

vertical direction.

Concrete Detailing 137 Panels and walls

 Option Description

1 Select the top connection pieces for the

electric box.
2 Select the left side connection pieces for the
electric box.
3 Select the right side connection pieces for
the electric box.
4 Select the bottom connection pieces for the
electric box.
Dimensions of the connection pieces.

Positions of the connection pieces.

Concrete Detailing 138 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Options to add the electric box to the part.
The options are:
• Create electric box
• Create electric box + cut electric box
• Create electric box + cut bounding box

Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab

Use the Top conn and Bottom conn tabs to control the shape and dimensions of the top and
bottom connection boxes, and to define a possible connection piece (Tube a) in the Electric
box in wall (84).

Top box / Bottom box / Tube a

Option Description
t, b, h Top and bottom connection box and the connection piece (Tube a)
thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name for the connection box and the connection piece.
Class Part class number for the connection box and the connection piece.
Comment Add a comment for the connection box and the connection piece.

Rotation
Control the rotation of the connection piece (Tube a).

Connection box shape

Top conn Bottom conn Description

Profiles / Custom part You can use a profile from the
profile catalog or select a
custom component from the

Concrete Detailing 139 Panels and walls

Top conn Bottom conn Description
Applications and Components
catalog.
If you use a custom component,
browse for the component and
use the list of options to
position the custom component.
Select the shape of the
connection box and define the
dimensions for the box.

Dimensions of the connection

box.

Position of the connection

piece.

Options to add the connection

box to the part.
The options are:
• Create connection box
• Create connection box +
cut connection box
• Create connection box +
cut bounding box

Concrete Detailing 140 Panels and walls

 Top conn Bottom conn Description
Select the connection pieces for
the connection box.

Select the number of

connection boxes.

Connect
Define how to the connection box is connected.

Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab

Use the UDA tab to add information in the parts’ user-defined attributes (UDAs) in the
Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool.

Option Description
Part Select to which part the related information can be saved:
Nothing
Tube top
Tube bottom
Tubes
Electric box
Top connection
Bottom connection
All

Concrete Detailing 141 Panels and walls

 Option Description
UDA Enter the name of the user- UDA name: UDA:
name defined attribute.
• comment • Comment
For example, to add a
• fabricator • Fabricator
comment UDA, open the
name
objects.inp file in a text • art_number
editor and search for • Article number
• type
comment. The following • Type
attribute is shown:
attribute("comment",
"j_comment", string,
"%s", no, none,
"0.0", "0.0")
The first text between the
quotation marks is the UDA
name, comment. The entered
name is case sensitive.
Type Type of the user-defined Use String for text, Integer for
attribute. numbers, Float for numbers with
decimals and Option for selecting an
item in a list. You can find the UDA
type in the objects.inp file
Value Enter the value that is saved to the user-defined attribute.

Example

Concrete Detailing 142 Panels and walls

Sandwich And Double Wall
Sandwich And Double Wall creates a precast concrete wall. The wall consists of an inner
shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell.

Objects created
• Inner shell
• Foil (optional)
• Insulation (optional)
• Outer shell (optional)

Concrete Detailing 143 Panels and walls

Use for

Situation Description
Sandwich wall, split shells.

Sandwich wall, brick wall on outer shell as

surface treatment.

Selection order
1. Pick the first point.
2. Pick the second point.
The wall is created automatically when the second point is picked.

Concrete Detailing 144 Panels and walls

Part identification key

Part
1 Inner shell
2 Foil
3 Insulation
4 Outer shell

See also
Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab on page 145
Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab on page 150
Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab on page 154
Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab on page 160
Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab on page 162
Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab on page 165

Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the dimensions and positioning of the sandwich wall inner shell,
foil, insulation, and outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. The inner shell is always
created.

Numbering settings
Set Numbering settings to Enabled to show Prefix and Start number for all parts.

Concrete Detailing 145 Panels and walls

Inner shell

Option Description Default

Thickness Define the thickness of the 150 mm
inner shell.

Foil

Option Description Default

Thickness Define the thickness of the 1 mm
foil.
Create foil Define whether the foil is Yes and subassembly
created.

Insulation

Option Description Default

Thickness Define the thickness of the 50 mm
insulation.
Create insulation Define whether the insulation Yes and subassembly
is created.

Outer shell

Option Description Default

Thickness Define the thickness of the 1 mm
outer shell.
Create outer shell Define whether the outer Yes + cast unit
shell is created:

Option Description Default

Pos_No Define a prefix and a start The default part start number is
number for the part position defined on the Tools --> Options -->
number. Options... --> Components tab.
Some components have a
second row of fields where you
can enter the assembly
position number.
Material Define the material grade. The default material is defined on the
Tools --> Options --> Options... -->
Components tab, in the Part
material field.
Name Define a name that is shown in
drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number.

Concrete Detailing 146 Panels and walls

Positioning
You can use Standard or Advanced positioning. With advanced positioning, there are more
options for sandwich wall width and foil position.

Sandwich wall width

Option: Standard Description

No gaps between the parts. Sandwich wall
thickness is the sum of all created parts.

Define the total wall width.

A gap is created between the outer shell and
the insulation.

Option: Advanced Description

Define the total wall width and the gap
between the inner shell and the insulation.
Another gap is created between the outer
shell and the insulation.

Define the total wall width and the gap

between the outer shell and the insulation.
Another gap is created between the inner
shell and the insulation.

Define the total wall width and the gap

between the inner shell and the insulation.
No gap is created between the outer shell
and the insulation.

Concrete Detailing 147 Panels and walls

Foil position

Option Description
By default, the foil is placed on the outer
side of the inner shell.

Define another foil position. Set Positioning

to Advanced.

Point offset

Option Description
Define the offset from the outer face of the
inner shell.

Concrete Detailing 148 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Define the offset from the inner face of the
inner shell.

Define the offset from the center of the

sandwich wall.

Define the offset from the inner face of outer

shell.

Define the offset from the outer face of

outer shell.

Parametric profile

Option Description
Parametric section Set to Enabled to define the prefix for the
parametric profiles of the sandwich parts.
Prefix for the parametric profile Select the prefix for the parametric profile:
• Position h*b and Position
b*h to create plate profiles without a
prefix.
If Parametric section is set to Disabled,
the parts have an h*b prefix, for
example, 2000*100.
• Position PLh*b and Position
PLb*h to create plate profiles whose
prefix starts with PL.

Concrete Detailing 149 Panels and walls

 Option Description
• Par. section h*b and Par.
section b*h require you to enter a
parametric plate profile prefix.
Par. section prefix Define the prefix of the parametric profile.

Concrete Detailing 150 Panels and walls

Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab
Use the Vertical section tab to control the vertical level part properties in Sandwich And
Double Wall. You can define both the top and the bottom level. The levels can be set as
absolute levels, or vertically relative (displaced) to the points.

Top level

Option Description
n1, n2, n3, n4 Define the absolute top level height.
h1, h2, h3, h4 Define the part height from the bottom face.
d2, d3, d4 Define the vertical displacement from the
adjacent part.

When you use relative levels, the levels of all other parts depend on the inner shell level.

Bottom level

Option Description
m1, m2, m3, m4 Define the absolute bottom level height.
a1, a2, a3, a4 Define the bottom offset from the point.
b2, b3, b4 Define the vertical displacement from the
adjacent part.

Concrete Detailing 151 Panels and walls

When you use relative levels, the levels of all other parts depend on the inner shell level.

Thicken innershell
You can define a thickening for both the top and the bottom side of the inner shell.

Option Description Example

Inner shell is not thickened.

Inner shell is thickened

towards the outer face of the
insulation.
Define the insulation height to
prevent collisions.

Concrete Detailing 152 Panels and walls

 Option Description Example
Inner shell is thickened to the
inner face of the outer shell.

Inner shell is thickened to the

outer face of the outer shell.
Define the outer shell height
to prevent collisions.

Option Description Example

Thickness Define the inner shell thickness.
If you do not enter a value, the
inner shell thickness defined on the
Parts tab is used.

Thickening parts Select how the top and bottom

thickening parts are added to the
inner shell.

Concrete Detailing 153 Panels and walls

 Option Description Example
Offset options Select the offset options for the
thickening parts. Offset can be
defined for both wall ends.

Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab

Use the Horizontal section tab to define the wall ends and to control how the wall parts are
split in the horizontal direction in Sandwich And Double Wall.

Wall end
The wall end options are the same for both ends.

First wall end Second wall end

Concrete Detailing 154 Panels and walls

Wall end offset

Option Description Example

Inner shell end is fixed.
Define the offset for the ends
of the foil, insulation, and
outer shell.

Insulation end is fixed.

Define the offset for the ends
of the inner shell, foil, and
outer shell.

Outer shell end is fixed.

Define the offset for the ends
of the inner shell, foil, and
insulation.

Corner shape to the inside

direction.
For the outer shell angle,
define the offset from the
inner face of the inner shell.
Insulation is along the inner
shell.

Corner shape to the inside

direction.
Define the length of the
outer shell angle.

Concrete Detailing 155 Panels and walls

Option Description Example
Corner shape to the inside
direction.
For the outer shell angle,
define the offset from the
inner face of the inner shell.
Insulation is along the outer
shell.

Corner shape to the outside

direction.
Define the horizontal offset
for the outer shell. There is
no gap between the
insulation and the inner shell
angle.

Corner shape to the outside

direction.
Define the horizontal offset
for the outer shell. For the
inner shell angle, define the
offset from the outer face of
the inner shell.

Corner shape to the outside

direction.
Define the horizontal offset
for the outer shell. For the
inner shell angle, define the
length.

Angled shells are not created.

Define horizontal offset for
the inner shell, insulation,
and outer shell.

Concrete Detailing 156 Panels and walls

Corner shape

Option Description
Select the inner shell corner shape.

Select the outer shell corner shape.

Select the insulation corner shape.

Add corner to main shell Add the corner to the shell. The options are:
• Add to 4 Cast Unit (4 = outer shell)
• Add to 4 Sub assembly
• Add to 1 Cast Unit (1 = inner shell)
• Add to 1 Sub assembly

Concrete Detailing 157 Panels and walls

Vertical chamfer

Option Description
Define whether a vertical chamfer is created.
Define the horizontal and vertical chamfer dimensions, and
the part prefix and the start number.

Horizontal offset
To use the options, set the Split Front view option to Enabled.

Option Description
Define the horizontal offset for the foil, insulation, and
outer shell. The main gap between the inner shells is
defined in the Split Front view section of the tab.

Define the horizontal offset for the inner shell, foil, and
outer shell. The main gap between the insulation parts is
defined in the Split Front view section of the tab.

Define the horizontal offset for the inner shell, foil, and
insulation. The main gap between outer shells is defined
in the Split Front view section of the tab.

Define a 90-degree angle for the inner shell and the

vertical offset towards the angled shell from the inner
face of the outer shell. The main gap between the inner
shells is defined in the Split Front view section of the
tab.
Additional options for the 90-degree angle:

Concrete Detailing 158 Panels and walls

 Option Description
• Define the corner shapes for the inner shell.

• Define how the corner is added to the inner shell.

• Define the part prefix and the start number.

Mirroring

Option Description
Define whether the sandwich wall is
mirrored.

Splitting parts
To split wall parts, set the Split Front view option to Enabled.

Option Description
Parts are not split. Define the horizontal
offset for both wall ends using the points as
reference points.
Parts are split. Define the section width and
the number of sections.
First end offset is the reference for the first
section width at the first wall end.
Second end offset is the reference for the
last section width at the second wall end.
Parts are split. Define the section width and
the number of sections.
First end offset is the reference for the first
section width at the first wall end.
Point (2) is the reference of the last section
width at the second wall end.

Concrete Detailing 159 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Parts are split. Define the section width and
enter the number of sections.
Point (1) is the reference of the start section
at the first wall end.
Second end offset is the reference for the
last section width at the second wall end.
Parts are split. Define the section width and
enter the number of sections.
Points (1, 2) are the references for the
section width at both wall ends.

Option Description
Define the horizontal direction.

Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab

Use the Insulation tab to control the vertical and/or horizontal splitting of the insulation in
Sandwich And Double Wall.

Dimensions

Concrete Detailing 160 Panels and walls

 Option Description
1 Define whether the insulation is split:
• Insulation is not split.

• Insulation is split in the horizontal

direction.

• Insulation is split in the vertical

direction.

• Insulation is split in the horizontal and

vertical direction.

2 Define the number and width of the middle

sections.
3 Define the gap between the sections.
4 Define the width of the first and last section
in the horizontal direction.
5 Define the height of the top and bottom
section in the vertical direction.
6 Define which wall end is used for distributing
the insulation sections.

Concrete Detailing 161 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Point direction Define the direction of the points. The
options are horizontal or vertical.

This option affects the representation of

workshop drawings.

Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab

Use the Outside shell tab to control the vertical and/or horizontal splitting of the outer shell
in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can also define chamfers and add a brick wall surface.

Dimensions

Option Description
Define the direction for the splitting.

Description
1 Define whether the outer shell is split:
• Outer shell is not split.

Concrete Detailing 162 Panels and walls

 Description
• Outer shell is split in the horizontal
direction.

• Outer shell is split in the vertical

direction.

• Outer shell is split in the horizontal and

vertical direction.

2 Define the number and width of the middle

sections.
3 Define the gap between the sections.
4 Define the width of the first and last section
in the horizontal direction.
5 Define the height of the top and bottom
section in the vertical direction.

Chamfering

Option Description
Vertical chamfers Define the vertical chamfers. Select a
chamfer shape from the list and define the
chamfer dimensions.

Concrete Detailing 163 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Horizontal chamfers Define the horizontal chamfers. Select a
chamfer shape from the list and define the
chamfer dimensions.

Chamfer side Define the sides where the chamfers are

created.

For example:

Brick wall properties

Set the Brick wall option to Enabled to create a brick wall.

Concrete Detailing 164 Panels and walls

 Option Description Example
Select the brick wall type for
the outer shell and define the
brick dimensions, mortar
height and width.

Wall edges Define whether the wall

edges are created as loose
parts or whether they are
added into an assembly.

Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab

Use the UDA tab to define user-defined attributes for the inner shell, foil, insulation, and
outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can define multiple UDAs for each part. UDAs
can be used as filters, and they can be displayed in drawings and reports.

User-defined attributes
For example:

Concrete Detailing 165 Panels and walls

Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam creates a horizontal seam between two sandwich walls.
Seam dimensions and rabbets can be defined for all layers: inner shell, foil, insulation, and
outer shell. In addition, you can define an extra foil layer.

Concrete Detailing 166 Panels and walls

Objects created
• Seams
• Rabbets
• Foil
• Insulation
• Extra foil layer

Use for

Situation Description
Seams between sandwich wall shells.

Seams with additional rabbets.

Before you start

To be able to select the needed parts, activate the Select objects in components
switch.

Selection order
1. Select the inner shell of the first sandwich wall.
2. Select the inner shell of the second sandwich wall.
The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

Concrete Detailing 167 Panels and walls

Part identification key

Part
1 Concrete part (wall, column, beam, slab)
2 Point
Multiple points can be picked.

See also
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab on page 168
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab on page 171
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab on page 171

Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the horizontal seam properties in Sandwich Wall Horizontal
Seam.

Seam position
Seams can be defined for inner shells, insulation and outer shells. Draft angles can be defined
for the outer shells.

Concrete Detailing 168 Panels and walls

Define the seam position between the sandwich wall shells. The middle line between the
walls is used as a reference when the seam position is calculated.
Example:

Shell classes

Define the part classes to be applied to the seams. By default, the Sandwich Wall Horizontal
Seam component creates inner shells with class 1, foil with class 2, insulation with class 3,
and outer shells with class 4. Use these classes to apply seams.
To prevent the creation of seams between foils, insulation shells and outer shells, leave the
Insulation classes box empty.

Rabbets in insulation
You can create rabbets in the insulation layer.

Concrete Detailing 169 Panels and walls

 Option Description
No rabbet for the insulation layer.

One side rabbet for the top and bottom of

the insulation layer.
Rabbet depth and width can be defined.

Mirrored one side rabbet for the top and

bottom of the insulation layer.
Rabbet depth and width can be defined.

Two sided rabbets for the top and bottom of

the insulation layer.
Rabbet depth and width can be defined.

Concrete Detailing 170 Panels and walls

Offset
You can define offset for the seam.

Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab

Use the Rabbets tab to define rabbets in inner shells, insulation layers and outer shells in
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam.

Rabbet side
Select to which side of the sandwich wall the rabbets are applied. You can define the rabbets
separately for both sides.
The options are:
• Top side
• Bottom side
• Both sides

Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab

Use the Extra foils tab to define an extra foil layer in the seam in Sandwich Wall Horizontal
Seam.

Foil

Option Description Default

t Define the extra foil 1 mm
thickness.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start The default part start number
number for the part position is defined on the Tools -->
number. Options --> Options... -->
Components tab.
Material Define the material grade. The default material is
defined on the Tools -->
Options --> Options... -->
Components tab, in the Part
material field.
Name Define the name for the extra FOIL
foil.

Concrete Detailing 171 Panels and walls

 Option Description Default
Class Define the part class number
for the extra foil layer.
Comment Add a comment for the extra
foil layer.

Connection method

Option Description
No connection Select how the extra foil is attached to the sandwich wall.
Option The options are:
• No connection (foil is a loose part)
• Weld
• Cast unit
• As subassembly
At Inside shell Select the profile to which the extra foil is connected.
The options are:
• At inside shell
• At outside shell
Position h*b Select a prefix for the foil layer.
• Position h*b and Position b*h create a profile without a
prefix.
• Position PLh*b and Position PLb*H create a profile which
start with PL prefix.
• Par. section h*b and Par. section b*h: enter a prefix in the
box below.
Auto Select the rotation of the foil layer.
The options are:
• Auto
• Below
• Front
• Top
• Back

Concrete Detailing 172 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Foil shape Define shape of the extra foil.

Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam

Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam creates a vertical seam between two sandwich walls. Seam
dimensions and rabbets can be defined for all layers: inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer
shell.

Objects created
• Seam
• Rabbets
• Foil
• Insulation

Concrete Detailing 173 Panels and walls

Use for

Situation Description
Seams between sandwich wall shells.

Seams with additional rabbets.

Limitations
The component works only if the sandwich walls are parallel.

Before you start

To be able to select the needed parts, activate the Select objects in components
switch.

Selection order
1. Select the inner shell of the first sandwich wall.
2. Select the inner shell of the second sandwich wall.
The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

Part identification key

Part
1 Inner shell of the first sandwich wall

Concrete Detailing 174 Panels and walls

 Part
2 Inner shell of the second sandwich wall

See also
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab on page 175
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab on page 175

Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the vertical seam properties in Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam.

Seam position
Seams can be defined for inner shells, insulation and outer shells. Draft angles can be defined
for the outer shells.

Define the seam position between the sandwich wall shells. The middle line between the
walls is used as a reference when the seam position is calculated.
Example:

Concrete Detailing 175 Panels and walls

Shell classes

Define the part classes to be applied to the seams. By default, the Sandwich Wall Vertical
Seam component creates inner shells with class 1, foil with class 2, insulation with class 3
and outer shells with class 4. Use these classes to apply seams.
For example, to prevent the creation of seams between foils, insulation shells and outer
shells, leave the Insulation classes box empty.

Asymmetrical seams
You can create asymmetrical seams and/or rabbets in the insulation layer.

Option Description
Symmetrical seams.
No rabbet for the insulation layer.

Concrete Detailing 176 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Symmetrical seams.
Rabbet depth can be defined for the
insulation layer.

Asymmetrical seams for the insulation layer

and outer shell.
No rabbet for the insulation layer.

Asymmetrical seams for the insulation layer

and outer shell.
Rabbet depth can be defined for the
insulation layer.

Offset / Mirror

You can define offset for the seam.

Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Rabbets tab

Use the Rabbets tab to define rabbets in inner shells, insulation layers and outer shells in
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam.

Rabbet side
Select to which side of the sandwich wall the rabbets are applied.

Concrete Detailing 177 Panels and walls

• Right side
Rabbets are equal on both sides, but the rabbet dimensions on the right side are applied
to both sides.

• Left side
Rabbets are equal on both sides, but the rabbet dimensions on the left side are applied to
both sides.

• Both sides
Rabbet dimensions can be defined separately for both sides.

Concrete Detailing 178 Panels and walls

• Both sides mirrored
Rabbet dimensions can be defined separately for both sides, but sides are mirrored.

Rabbet position
Typically the vertical seams go from the top to the bottom of the sandwich wall. Define the
seam offsets for the top and bottom sides. Offsets are applied only to the inner and outer
shells.

Concrete Detailing 179 Panels and walls

Sandwich Wall Window
Sandwich Wall Window creates a rectangular opening in a sandwich wall. The opening is
created through up to four parts (inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell). You can select
whether the foil is created. A frame can be created, as well as extra foils and additional parts.
The frame can be a wooden frame or a concrete border, added to the inner shell.

Objects created
• Rectangular opening
• Wooden frame or concrete border
• Extra foils
• Additional parts

Use for

Situation Description
Opening in a sandwich wall, with a wooden
frame and foil layers.

Concrete Detailing 180 Panels and walls

 Situation Description
Opening in a sandwich wall, with a concrete
border in the inner shell.

Selection order
1. Pick the first position.
2. Pick the second position.
The opening is created automatically when the second position is picked.

Part identification key

Part
1 Sandwich wall element
2 First picked position
3 Optional: second picked position

Concrete Detailing 181 Panels and walls

See also
Sandwich Wall Window: Picture tab on page 182
Sandwich Wall Window: Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab on page 183
Sandwich Wall Window: Top detail tab on page 187
Sandwich Wall Window: Extra foils tab on page 190
Sandwich Wall Window: Additional parts tab on page 192
Sandwich Wall Window: Connections tab on page 195

Sandwich Wall Window: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the dimensions and parts of the opening in the Sandwich
Wall Window.

Dimensions

Option Description
1 Set the points for the opening:
• 2 points
Pick two points to create the opening
(points 2 and 3 in the image).
• Point 1 B H
Pick one point to create the opening
(point 2 in the image). This point is the
opening reference point. Define the width
and height of the opening.
• Point 2 B H
Pick one point to create the opening
(point 3 in the image). This point is the

Concrete Detailing 182 Panels and walls

 Option Description
opening reference point. Define the width
and height of the opening.
• 2 Points H
Pick two points to create the opening
(points 2 and 3 in the image). Define the
height of the opening.
2 Vertical offset from the insertion point.
3 Horizontal offset from the insertion point.
4 Width of the opening.
5 Height of the opening.

Select other layers

Option Description
Insulation, Wall Parts where the opening is created.
If you do not enter any numbers, the opening
is only created to the part you selected when
applying the component.
Foil To create the foil, select Yes in the Foil
option. By default, the foil is not created.
The frame shape options shown on the
Bottom detail, Left detail, Right detail, and
Top detail tabs depend on whether the foil is
created not.

Sandwich Wall Window: Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab
Use the Bottom detail tab, Left detail tab, and Right detail tab to control the size, position,
number, and shape of the opening bottom, left side, and right side in the Sandwich Wall
Window modeling tool.

Frame

Part Description Default

Frame Define the frame profile by 50*50
selecting the profile from the
profile catalog.

Concrete Detailing 183 Panels and walls

 Option Description Default
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for Prefix:empty, Start number:
the part position number. 1
Some components have a The default part start number
second row of fields where is defined on the Tools -->
you can enter the assembly Options --> Options... -->
position number. Components tab.
Material Material grade. The default material is
defined on the Tools -->
Options --> Options... -->
Components tab, in the Part
material field.
Name Name that is shown in
drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Frame shape
The options for inner and outer frame are the same regardless of whether the foil is created
or not.

Inner Outer Description

Default
Cut or extension is not
created.
AutoDefaults can change this
option. Any of the three
options is used depending on
the frame size.

Cut or extension is not

created.

Concrete Detailing 184 Panels and walls

Inner Outer Description
Extension is created.
If the frame is narrower than
the insulation, the concrete
part is extended to fill the
gap.

Cut is created.
If the frame is wider than the
insulation, the concrete part
is cut so that the frame fits.

Middle
Foil is not created.
Cut is not created.

Foil is not created.

Frame is not created.

Concrete Detailing 185 Panels and walls

 Middle
Foil is created.
Cut is not created.

Foil is created.
Cut is created.

Foil is created.
Frame is not created.

Additional recess
Define the vertical and horizontal dimensions for the additional recess. By default, the recess
is not created.

Frame corner cuts

Option Description
Frame corners are not cut.

Concrete Detailing 186 Panels and walls

 Option Description
Define the horizontal and vertical dimensions
of the frame corner cuts.

Sandwich Wall Window: Top detail tab

Use the Top detail tab to control the size, position, number, and shape of the opening top
side in the Sandwich Wall Window.

Part

Part Description Default

Frame Define the frame profile by 50*50
selecting the profile from the
profile catalog.
Foil2 Define the thickness of the
foil.

Option Description Default

Pos_No Prefix and a start number for Prefix: empty, Start number:
the part position number. 1
Some components have a The default part start number
second row of fields where is defined on the Tools -->
you can enter the assembly Options --> Options... -->
position number. Components tab.
Material Material grade. The default material is
defined on the Tools -->
Options --> Options... -->
Components tab, in the Part
material field.
Name Name that is shown in
drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Top frame shape

The options for inner and outer frame are the same regardless of whether the foil is created
or not.

Concrete Detailing 187 Panels and walls

Inner Outer Description
Default
Cut or extension is not
created.
AutoDefaults can change this
option. Any of the three
options is used depending on
the frame size.

Cut or extension is not

created.

Extension is created.
If the frame is narrower than
the insulation, the concrete
part is extended to fill the
gap.

Cut is created.
If the frame is wider than the
insulation, the concrete part
is cut so that the frame fits.

Concrete Detailing 188 Panels and walls

 Middle Description
Foil is not created.
Cut is not created.

Foil is not created.

Frame is not created.

Foil is created.
Cut is created.

Foil is created.
Frame is not created.

Additional recess
Define the vertical and horizontal dimensions for the additional recess. By default, the recess
is not created.

Concrete Detailing 189 Panels and walls

Frame corner cuts

Option Description
Frame corners are not cut.

Horizontal and vertical dimensions of the

frame corner cuts.

Drip mold

Option Description
Drip mold is not created.

Drip mold is created. Define the mold

dimensions.

Drip mold is created. Define the mold

dimensions.
The drip mold can be created to any of the
shape options. For example, if the shape has
a bevel, the drip mold is created at the same
angle as the bevel.

Concrete Detailing 190 Panels and walls

Sandwich Wall Window: Extra foils tab
Use the Extra foils tab to control the creation of extra foils on the top, bottom, right side,
and left side of the opening in the Sandwich Wall Window.

Extra foil

Part Description Default

Extra foil Thickness of the foil. 50*50

Option Description Default

Pos_No Prefix and a start number for Prefix: empty, Start number:
the part position number. 1
Some components have a The default part start number
second row of fields where is defined on the Tools -->
you can enter the assembly Options --> Options... -->
position number. Components tab.
Material Material grade. The default material is
defined on the Tools -->
Options --> Options... -->
Components tab, in the Part
material field.
Name Name that is shown in
drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Extra foil dimensions

Description Default
1 Define whether extra foils are
created.
2 Define the inside offset. 2* screw diameter
3 Define the foil width. 2* screw diameter

Concrete Detailing 191 Panels and walls

Shells to cut

Option Description
All shells are cut.

The inner shell is not cut.

The inner shell and the foil are not cut.

The inner shell and the foil are not cut. An

insulation extension is created.
Define the width and the material grade of
the insulation extension.
The outer shell is cut.

Sandwich Wall Window: Additional parts tab

Use the Additional parts tab to control the size, position, number, and alignment of
additional parts in the Sandwich Wall Window.

Parts
Select whether additional parts, custom component parts, or no additional parts are created.

Part Description Default

Parts Define the profile of the 50*50
additional parts by selecting
the profile from the profile
catalog.
Custom component parts Define the custom
component parts by selecting
the component from the
Applications and
Components catalog.
You can also use a
configuration file to define
the properties.

Concrete Detailing 192 Panels and walls

 Option Description Default
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for Prefix: empty, Start number:
the part position number. 1
Some components have a
second row of fields where
you can enter the assembly
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in
drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Define distances
Select whether to define the distances between the parts by entering the distance
dimensions on this tab or by using an external text file. You can use an external file to
automate the creation of additional parts when window sizes differ.
The name of the external file is SandwichPanelWindowAdditionalParts.dat.
The file is located in the ..\Environments\Common\system folder.
The image below shows an example of a local standard for creating additional parts. M is a
module that is 100 mm.

The SandwichPanelWindowAdditionalParts.dat configuration file that

contains the needed specifications for the example above is as follows:

Concrete Detailing 193 Panels and walls

The keywords BOTTOM, TOP, LEFT and RIGHT define the side of the window the settings
are applied to.
The syntax in the file is as follows: bmin;bmax;cm;nd;dmax;d1;d2;d3.

bmin Smallest window dimension to apply the setting.

bmax Biggest window dimension to apply the setting.
cm Creation method:
• 1 means use the number of parts for nd.
• 2 means use maximum spacing for nd.
nd Depending on the creation method (cm):
• Number of parts, when cm is 1.
• Maximum allowed distance between parts, when cm is 2.
d1 Distance from the start point to the first additional part (optional).
d2 Distance from the first additional part to the second (optional).
d3 Distance from the second additional part to the third (optional).

The additional parts are placed symmetrically, so distances d1, d2 and d3 are also used from
the end point. If the optional distances d1, d2 and d3 are not defined, the parts are placed
at equal distances.
In the image above 0;599;1;1 means that when the window width is equal or bigger than
0, but equal or less than 599, the creation method is by number of parts and 1 part should be
created.
600;1200;2;300;145 would mean that when the window width is equal or bigger than
600, but equal or less than 1200, the creation method is use maximum spacing. The
maximum allowed spacing between additional parts is 300 mm. The first part (and last part)
distance is 145 mm. If the window width is 1200, three more parts are needed (1200 -
2x145)/300=3.03. The spacing between the additional parts will then be (1200 - 2x145)/4 =
227.5 mm.

Concrete Detailing 194 Panels and walls

Distance dimensions

Description
1 Horizontal distance from the first additional part to the foil edge.
2 Vertical distance from the first additional part to the foil edge.
3 Select the additional part distribution.
4 Maximum distance between the additional parts, or the number of
additional parts.

Placement
Select whether additional part placement is the same or different on each side.

Option Description
Define the placement dimensions for the
bottom, left side, and right side.
If additional part placement is the same on
each side, define the bottom dimensions
only.

Define the placement dimensions for the top

side.

Sandwich Wall Window: Connections tab

Use the Connections tab to control how the wooden frame, additional parts, extra foil, and
extensions are connected to the shells in the Sandwich Wall Window.

Concrete Detailing 195 Panels and walls

 Add

Option Description
Wooden frame to, Additional parts, Extra Select to which part the wooden frame,
foil to additional parts, and extra foil are
connected.
The Extra foil to option is shown if you have
selected to create the foil on the Picture tab.

Connect extensions to their shells

Option Description
Inside shell extension, Outside shell Select how the extension parts are
extension, Insulation shell extension, Foil connected to their main parts.
extension
The Foil extension option is shown if you
have selected to create the foil on the
Picture tab.

1.4 Formwork components

This section introduces formwork components.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Beam Formwork on page 196
• Column Formwork on page 201
• Wall Formwork on page 205
• General Beam Form on page 209
• General Wall Form on page 212
• General Clamp on page 215
• General Clip on page 217
• General Tie on page 218
• General Tie and Clips on page 220

Beam Formwork
Beam Formwork creates a timber formwork around a beam.

Concrete Detailing 196 Formwork components

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Timber formwork (bottom and side plywood panels, supports, walers)
• Ties
• Clips

Use for

Situation Description
Beam formwork

Limitations
Beam Formwork works only with rectangular beams.

Before you start

Create a concrete beam.

Selection order
1. Select the beam.
The beam formwork is created automatically.

Concrete Detailing 197 Formwork components

Part identification key

Part
1 Bottom and side plywood panels
2 Bottom and side supports
3 Waler
4 Tie and clip

See also
Beam Formwork: Beam tab on page 198
Beam Formwork: Parameters tab on page 200

Beam Formwork: Beam tab

Use the Beam tab to control the dimensions, spacings and part properties of the plywood
panels and supports in Beam Formwork.

Concrete Detailing 198 Formwork components

Dimensions

Description
1 Spacing between side supports.
2 Beam form length.
3 Distance to first bottom support from the form edge.
4 Spacing between bottom supports.
5 Bottom support length.

Plywood panel and support properties

Option Description
Bottom Profile Thickness, width and height for the bottom plywood
panel.
Side Profile Thickness, width and height for the side plywood
panel.
Bottom Support Thickness, width and height for the bottom support.
Side Support Thickness, width and height for the side support.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Beam formwork properties

Option Description
Beam Name, prefix and start number for the beam
formwork cast unit.

Concrete Detailing 199 Formwork components

Beam Formwork: Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to control the waler properties and the dimensions and spacings of
the clips and walers in Beam Formwork.

Dimensions

Description
1 Waler extension length.
2 Number of walers and clips in vertical direction.
3 Vertical spacing between clips.
4 Vertical distance to first clip from the form edge.
5 Horizontal distance to first clip from the form edge.
6 Horizontal spacing between clips.

Waler properties

Option Description
Waler Profile Thickness, width and height for the walers.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Concrete Detailing 200 Formwork components

Tie and clip properties

Option Description
Tie Component Name Define the component that you want to use
as tie by selecting it from the Applications
and Components catalog.
Tie Attribute File Select an attribute file for the component.
Clip Component Name Define the component that you want to use
as clip by selecting it from the Applications
and Components catalog.
Clip Attribute File Select an attribute file for the component.

Column Formwork
Column Formwork creates a timber formwork around a column.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Timber formwork (plywood panels and supports on sides)
• Clamps

Concrete Detailing 201 Formwork components

Use for

Situation Description
Column formwork

Limitations
Column Formwork works only with rectangular columns.

Before you start

Create a concrete column.

Selection order
1. Select the column.
The column formwork is created automatically.

Concrete Detailing 202 Formwork components

Part identification key

Part
1 Plywood panel
2 Support
3 Clamp

See also
Column Formwork: Column tab on page 203

Column Formwork: Column tab

Use the Column tab to control the properties of clamps, plywood panels and supports in
Column Formwork.

Concrete Detailing 203 Formwork components

Dimensions

Description
1 Number of clamps.
2 Spacing between clamps.
3 Distance to first clamp from the bottom.

Clamp properties

Option Description
Clamp Name Define the component that you want to use
as clamp by selecting it from the
Applications and Components catalog.
Attribute File Select an attribute file for the component.

Plywood panel and support properties

Option Description
Plywood Profile Thickness, width and height for the plywood
panels.
Side Profile Thickness, width and height for the side
supports.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Concrete Detailing 204 Formwork components

Column formwork properties

Option Description
Panel Name, prefix and start number for the
column formwork cast unit.

Wall Formwork
Wall Formwork creates a timber formwork around a panel.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Timber formwork (plywood panels, studs, frame and walers)
• Ties
• Clips

Use for

Situation Description
Wall formwork

Limitations
Wall Formwork works only with single panels.

Before you start

Create a concrete panel.

Concrete Detailing 205 Formwork components

Selection order
1. Select the panel.
The wall formwork is created automatically.

Part identification key

Part
1 Stud
2 Walers
3 Plywood panel
4 Tie and clip
5 Frame

See also
Wall Formwork: Panel tab on page 206
Wall Formwork: Parameters tab on page 208

Wall Formwork: Panel tab

Use the Panel tab to control the properties of studs, frame and plywood panels in Wall
Formwork. Define the dimensions of wall form, studs and frame.

Concrete Detailing 206 Formwork components

Dimensions

Description
1 Distance to first stud from the form edge.
2 Spacing between studs.
3 Width of edge lap.
4 Height of wall form.
5 Length of wall form.

Frame, stud and plywood panel properties

Option Description
Edge Profile Thickness, width and height for the frames.
Stud Profile Thickness, width and height for the studs.
Plywood Profile Thickness, width and height for the plywood
panels.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.

Concrete Detailing 207 Formwork components

 Option Description
Class Part class number.

Wall formwork properties

Option Description
Panel Name, prefix and start number for the wall
formwork cast unit.

Wall Formwork: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the waler profile and the dimensions and spacings of the
clips and walers in Wall Formwork.

Dimensions

Description
1 Horizontal distance to first clip from the
form edge.
2 Horizontal spacing between clips.
3 Length of waler extension.
4 Number of walers and clips in vertical
direction.
5 Vertical spacing between clips.
6 Vertical distance to first clip from the form
edge.

Concrete Detailing 208 Formwork components

Waler properties

Option Description
Waler Profile Thickness, width and height for the walers.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Tie and clip properties

Option Description
Clip Component Name Define the component that you want to use
as clip by selecting it from the Applications
and Components catalog.
Clip Component File Select an attribute file for the component.
Tie Component Name Define the component that you want to use
as tie by selecting it from the Applications
and Components catalog.
Tie Component File Select an attribute file for the component.

General Beam Form

General Beam Form creates plywood panels and supports. You can use General Beam Form
as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Beam Formwork.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Plywood panels on sides and bottom
• Supports on sides and bottom

Concrete Detailing 209 Formwork components

Use for

Situation Description
Beam form in a beam formwork.

Limitations
General Beam Form works only with rectangular beams.

Selection order
1. Pick the start point.
2. Pick the end point.
The beam form is created automatically.

Part identification key

Part
1 Side support
2 Side plywood panel
3 Bottom plywood panel
4 Bottom support

See also
Beam Form: Parameters tab on page 210

Concrete Detailing 210 Formwork components

Beam Form: Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to control the dimensions and properties of beam form in Beam
Form.

Dimensions

Description
1 Spacing between side supports.
2 Spacing between side plywood panels.
3 Height of side plywood panels.
4 Distance to first bottom support from the
form edge.
5 Spacing between bottom supports.
6 Length of bottom support.

Plywood panel and support properties

Option Description
Bottom Profile Thickness, width and height for the bottom
plywood panel.
Side Profile Thickness, width and height for the side
plywood panel.
Bottom Support Thickness, width and height for the bottom
support.
Side Support Thickness, width and height for the side
support.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.

Concrete Detailing 211 Formwork components

 Option Description
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Beam form properties

Option Description
Beam Name, prefix and start number for the beam
form cast unit.

General Wall Form

General Wall Form creates a timber form containing a plywood panel, a frame and studs.
You can use General Wall Form as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Wall
Formwork.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Plywood panel
• Studs
• Frame

Use for

Situation Description
Wall form in a wall formwork.

Concrete Detailing 212 Formwork components

Selection order
1. Select the start point.
2. Select the end point.
The wall form is created automatically.

Part identification key

Part
1 Stud
2 Frame
3 Plywood panel

See also
Wall Form: Parameters tab on page 213

Wall Form: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the wall form in Wall Form.

Concrete Detailing 213 Formwork components

Dimensions

Description
1 Distance to first stud from the form edge.
2 Spacing between studs.
3 Width of edge lap.
4 Height of wall form.
5 Define whether the wall form is created on
the left or right side.

Stud, frame and plywood panel properties

Option Description
Edge Profile Thickness, width and height for the frame.
Stud Profile Thickness, width and height for the studs.
Plywood Profile Thickness, width and height for the plywood
panel.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Concrete Detailing 214 Formwork components

Wall form properties

Option Description
Panel Name, prefix and start number for the wall
form cast unit.

General Clamp
General Clamp creates a clamp. You can use General Clamp as a stand-alone component or
as a subcomponent for Column Formwork.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
Clamps

Use for

Situation Description
Clamps in a column formwork.

Selection order
1. Select the start point.
2. Select the end point.
The clamps are created automatically.

See also
General Clamp: Parameters tab on page 215

Concrete Detailing 215 Formwork components

General Clamp: Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to control the properties and dimensions of clamps in General
Clamp.

Dimensions

Description
1 Length of the clamp.
2 Distance to first slot.
3 Number of slots.
4 Spacing between slots.
5 Profile of slots.

Clamp properties

Option Description
Clamp Profile Thickness, width and height for the clamps.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

Concrete Detailing 216 Formwork components

General Clip
General Clip creates a clip. You can use General Clip as a stand-alone component or as a
subcomponent for the Beam Formwork and Wall Formwork.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
Clip

Use for

Situation Description
Clip and tie in a beam formwork.

Selection order
1. Select the start point.
2. Select the end point.
The clip is created automatically.

See also
General Clip: Parameters tab on page 217

General Clip: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the dimensions and properties of clips in General Clip.

Concrete Detailing 217 Formwork components

Dimensions

Description
1 Length of the clip.
2 Width of the slot.
3 Length of the slot.

Clip properties

Option Description
Clip Profile Thickness, width and height for the clip.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

General Tie
General Tie creates a tie. You can use General Tie as a stand-alone component or as a sub-
component for Beam Formwork and Wall Formwork.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Tie

Concrete Detailing 218 Formwork components

• Spacers

Use for

Situation Description
Tie and clip in a wall formwork.

Selection order
1. Pick the start point.
2. Pick the end point.
The tie is created automatically.

Part identification key

Part
1 Spacer
2 Tie

See also
General Tie: Parameters tab on page 219

General Tie: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control tie dimensions and properties in General Tie.

Concrete Detailing 219 Formwork components

Dimensions

Description
1 Length of the tie end extension.
2 Length of the spacer.
3 Define whether or not to create spacers.

Tie and spacer properties

Option Description
Tie Profile Thickness, width and height for the tie.
Spacer Profile Thickness, width and height for the spacers.

Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.

General Tie and Clips

General Tie and Clips creates a tie and clips. You can use General Tie and Clips as a stand-
alone component or as a subcomponent for Beam Formwork and Wall Formwork.

Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork components and click
Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications and Components catalog.

Objects created
• Tie
• Clips
• Spacers

Concrete Detailing 220 Formwork components

Use for

Situation Description
Tie and clip in a wall formwork.

Selection order
1. Select the start point.
2. Select the end point.
3. The tie and clips are created automatically.

Part identification key

Part
1 Clip
2 Spacer
3 Tie

See also
General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab on page 221

General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of General Tie and Clips.

Concrete Detailing 221 Formwork components

 Dimensions

Description
1 Define the length of the tie end extension.

Tien and clip properties

Option Description
Tie Component Name Define the component that you want to use
as tie by selecting it from the Applications
and Components catalog.
Tie Attribute File Select an attribute file for the component.
Clip Component Name Define the component that you want to use
as clip by selecting it from the Applications
and Components catalog.
Clip Attribute File Select an attribute file for the component.

1.5 Openings
This section introduces components that can be used in concrete openings.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Hole Generation (32) on page 222
• Polygon Hole Generation (33) on page 225

Hole Generation (32)

Hole Generation (32) creates a hole in the object, or splits the object in two if the hole cuts
the whole object. Use this component, for example, in welded profiles, slabs, or panels
generated with a component.

Objects created
• Cuts

Concrete Detailing 222 Openings

Use for

Situation Description
A hole is created when a point is picked.

Selection order
1. Select the part or object created by a component to be cut.
2. Click the middle mouse button.
3. Pick the position relative to the hole being generated.

See also
Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab on page 223

Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the hole properties in the Hole Generation (32) modeling
tool.

Concrete Detailing 223 Openings

 Option Description
Define the hole dimensions and the location
of the picked point.
The selected Partcut option affects which of
these dimensions are available.

To rotate the hole, define the rotation angle.

Define the recess depth.

Partcut Select the hole type.

The options are:
• Rectangular creates a rectangular hole
using width and height.
• Circular creates a round hole using
height as a diameter.
• Profile creates a cut using the selected
profile.
Profile If you selected Profile as the hole type,
select a suitable profile from the Profile
Catalog.
Coordination system Select the coordination system.
The options are:
• Use global xy-plane creates the hole
according to the global coordinate
system.
• Use local creates the hole according to
the work plane.
If the part is sloped or skewed, the Use
local option is used automatically.
Cutpart name Define a name for the cut part.

Concrete Detailing 224 Openings

 Option Description
Rotated Select whether the cut is rotated 90 degrees
in the XY plane.

Polygon Hole Generation (33)

Polygon Hole Generation (33) creates a polygon-shaped hole in the object. Use this
component, for example, in welded profiles, slabs, or panels generated with a component.

Objects created
• Cut

Use for

Situation Description
A polygon-shaped hole in concrete
slabs, created by picking five points.

Selection order
To create a polygon-shaped hole:
1. Select the part or object (component) to be cut.

TIP You can cut other components, such as Modeling of floor bay (66) with this
component.

2. Click the middle mouse button to end selecting.

3. Pick the corner points of the polygon-shaped hole.
4. Click the middle mouse button to end picking.

Polygon Hole Generation (33): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the cuts created by Polygon Hole Generation (33).

Concrete Detailing 225 Openings

 Field Description
Cutting depth

1.6 Flooring
This section introduces components that can be used in concrete floors.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Automatic seam recognition (30) on page 226
• Seam Applicator on page 228
• Slab generation with polygon plate (61) on page 230
• Slab generation with points (62) on page 233
• Modeling of floor bay (66) on page 235
• Modeling of slab area (88) on page 244
• Sloping slab drainage on page 246
• Hollow Core Opening Tool on page 249
• Hollow Core Lifting Loops on page 253
• Floor Tool on page 257
• Floor Layout on page 261
• Floor Layout CIP Filler on page 284

Concrete Detailing 226 Flooring

Automatic seam recognition (30)
Automatic seam recognition (30) is used to add predefined custom seams between parallel
parts, such as slabs or wall elements. Especially useful this tool is when adding seams for
warped floors.

Use for

Situation More information

Use to connect parts with
predefined custom seams.

Before you start

Create parallel parts, for example, concrete slabs or walls.
Create custom seam.

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Automatic seam recognition (30) dialog box to define the following
properties:

Property Description
Seam name Enter the seam name, or use the browse
button (...) to locate the seam in the
Select component dialog box.
Seam property file Enter the name, or use the browse button
(...) to locate the name of the seam
attribute file (optional).
Seam direction Select to change the direction.
Seam input part Select to reverse the main and secondary
order part. You may need to change the Seam
up direction too.
Seam up direction Define the direction of the seam.

Concrete Detailing 227 Flooring

 Property Description
Re-calculate seam Use to re-calculate the seam points for all
points for parts or only for warped parts.
• All parts use for fully or partially
warped decks or floors. This option
creates all seam points in the same
way, no matter, if the slab is warped
or not.
• Warped parts use for wall panels and
other situations, where warping is not
used, or the All parts option does not
give desired result.
Position of re- Control the location of the re-calculated
calculated points seam points. The options in the list box
are same as the circles in the following
image.

Picking order
1. Pick the main part.
2. Pick secondary parts. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the
seams between the parts.

See also
For more information on custom components, see .

Seam Applicator
Seam Applicator creates a seam between two double tee slabs, or between a double tee slab
and a wall or a spandrel. The double tees can also be warped and/or cambered. To be able to
use Seam Applicator you need to have a custom seam. The custom seam can be created in
the model, or it can be imported to the model.

Objects created
• Seams

Concrete Detailing 228 Flooring

Use for

Situation Description
Two double tee slabs with seams

Double tee slab and wall with seams

Before you start

Create a custom seam.

NOTE When you define the custom seam in Custom Component Wizard, make sure that
you select the Allow multiple instances of connection between same parts
checkbox on the Advanced tab.

Selection order
1. Select the main part.
2. Select the secondary part.
The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.
One of the selected parts must be a double tee slab and the other part can be a double
tee slab, a wall, or a spandrel.

NOTE If the seam cannot be created between the selected parts for some reason, a
dummy beam is created instead. The beam indicates that the seam creation did
not succeed.

Concrete Detailing 229 Flooring

See also
Seam Applicator: Parameters tab on page 230

Seam Applicator: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the seam in Seam Applicator.

Option Description
Seam name Define the custom seam that connects the parts by
selecting it from the Applications and
Components catalog.
Seam property file Select the attribute file for the custom seam.
Seam direction Seam direction in relation to the main and the
secondary part.
Seam up direction Seam rotation.
Offset start point Seam start point offset from the edge of the double
tee slab start point.
Offset end point Seam end point offset from the edge of the double
tee slab end point.
Number of copies Number of seams.
Distance to first seam Distance between the double tee slab edge and the
first seam start point.
Spacing values Space between the seams.
Copy at equal distances (Ignore Define whether seams are created at equal
spacing values) distances.
If you select Yes, the values in Spacing values field
are ignored.

Slab generation with polygon plate (61)

Creates slabs based on the shape of an auxiliary plate.

Parts created
Concrete slabs.

Concrete Detailing 230 Flooring

Where to use

Situation More information

Hollow core slab created
using an auxiliary plate.
To change the shape or size
of the plate, use the Polygon
shape command. See .

Before you start

Create a contour plate or a concrete slab in the shape of the slabs you want to create. This is
the auxiliary plate.

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Slab generation with polygon plate (61) dialog box to define the
following properties:

Tab Contents More information

Parameters Slab dimensions, gaps Slab generation with
between slabs, slab direction polygon plate (61) and Slab
and distribution generation with points (62):
Parameters tab on page
231
Parts Slab properties Slab generation with
polygon plate (61) and Slab
generation with points (62):
Parts tab on page 232

Analysis Analysis properties of slab. Slab generation with

polygon plate (61) and Slab
generation with points (62):
Analysis tab on page 232
Loading Loads properties used for
analysis.

Selection order
Auxiliary plate.

Concrete Detailing 231 Flooring

Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62):
Parameters tab
Use these options to define slab properties:

Property Description
Gap between slabs. To create overlapping slabs,
enter a negative value.
Use this to allow for joint reinforcement,
grouting, etc.

Distance from the outer edges of the slabs and

the corner of the auxiliary plate. To create a slab
larger than the auxiliary plate, enter a negative
value.
Use this option to allow space for other parts,
such as bearing beams.
Generation Defines the direction in which Tekla Structures
direction creates the slabs.
Adjustment Defines which slab(s) to truncate or delete for
an even slab distribution. The options are first,
last, and first and last.

Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Parts tab
Define a profile by selecting it from the Profile Catalog. To select a slab type from the Profile
Catalog, click the button against the Slab field on the Parts tab.

Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Analysis
tab
Use the Analysis tab to define the analysis properties of the parts created using the Slab
generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62) modeling tools.

Option Description Only use for

Analysis type The option you select in the Analysis type list limits
the other properties you can define (see the Only
use for column)
Select how Tekla Structures analyzes the slabs.
• Ignore: Slabs are not analyzed.
• Beam: Analyze each slab as a beam.
• Plate: Analyze each slab as a plate.

Concrete Detailing 232 Flooring

 Option Description Only use for
• Rigid diaphragm: Analyze slabs as a rigid
diaphragm.
Beam axis Select the location of the beam axis. Beam
Restraints Select the support conditions of the beam ends. Beam
The options are Pinned and Fixed.
Plate plane Select the plane on which to create the elements Plate
and nodes. If you select Top plane, Tekla Structures
creates the elements on the top surface of the slab.
Element type Select the shape of the elements. Plate
Element size x and y: Define the approximate dimensions of the Plate
elements in the local x and y direction of the slab.
For triangular elements, define the approximate
dimensions of the bounding box around each
element.
Holes: Define the approximate size of the elements
around openings.
Filter Nodes that belong to a part matching the filter will Rigid diaphragm
be connected to the rigid diaphragm. For example,
you can use column_filter to connect only column
nodes to rigid diaphragms.

See also

Slab generation with points (62)

Creates slabs based on the corner points you pick.

Parts created
Concrete slabs.

Where to use

Situation More information

Double tee slabs created by
picking eight points.
You cannot change the
slab area once the slabs
are created.

Concrete Detailing 233 Flooring

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Slab generation with points (62) dialog box to define the following
properties:

Tab Contents More information

Parameters Slab dimensions, gaps Slab generation with
between slabs, slab direction polygon plate (61) and Slab
and distribution generation with points (62):
Parameters tab on page 231
Parts Slab properties Slab generation with
polygon plate (61) and Slab
generation with points (62):
Parts tab on page 232

Analysis Analysis properties of slab. Slab generation with

polygon plate (61) and Slab
generation with points (62):
Analysis tab on page 232
Loading Loads properties used for
analysis.

Selection order
Pick any number of points to indicate corners of the slab. Close the shape by picking the first
point you picked.

Slab generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62): Analysis
tab
Use the Analysis tab to define the analysis properties of the parts created using the Slab
generation with polygon plate (61) and Slab generation with points (62) modeling tools.

Option Description Only use for

Analysis type The option you select in the Analysis type list limits
the other properties you can define (see the Only
use for column)
Select how Tekla Structures analyzes the slabs.
• Ignore: Slabs are not analyzed.
• Beam: Analyze each slab as a beam.
• Plate: Analyze each slab as a plate.
• Rigid diaphragm: Analyze slabs as a rigid
diaphragm.
Beam axis Select the location of the beam axis. Beam

Concrete Detailing 234 Flooring

 Option Description Only use for
Restraints Select the support conditions of the beam ends. Beam
The options are Pinned and Fixed.
Plate plane Select the plane on which to create the elements Plate
and nodes. If you select Top plane, Tekla Structures
creates the elements on the top surface of the slab.
Element type Select the shape of the elements. Plate
Element size x and y: Define the approximate dimensions of the Plate
elements in the local x and y direction of the slab.
For triangular elements, define the approximate
dimensions of the bounding box around each
element.
Holes: Define the approximate size of the elements
around openings.
Filter Nodes that belong to a part matching the filter will Rigid diaphragm
be connected to the rigid diaphragm. For example,
you can use column_filter to connect only column
nodes to rigid diaphragms.

See also

Modeling of floor bay (66)

Creates an area of concrete slabs between two support lines that you define, for example,
between two main frames. Support lines can be polylines or sloped.

Parts created
Concrete slabs.

Concrete Detailing 235 Flooring

Where to use

Situation More information

Slab area created between
two support lines.

Before you start

Create two support lines with two or more points.

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Modeling of floor bay (66) dialog box to define the following properties:

Tab Contents More information

Parameters The position of the slab. Defining slab position on
page 239
Profiles The properties of slab profiles. Defining slab profile
properties on page 242

Picking order
1. Pick points to define the first support line. To finish, middle-click away from the last
point picked.
2. Pick points to define the second support line. To finish, middle-click away from the last
point picked.
3. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slabs.
4. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slabs.

See also
Examples on page 236

Concrete Detailing 236 Flooring

Examples
These examples show how to use the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.
Example 1:
1. Pick 2 points (1, 2) to define support line 1.
2. To finish, middle-click.

3. Pick 2 points to define support line 2.

4. To finish, middle-click.

5. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.

Concrete Detailing 237 Flooring

6. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.

Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.

Example 2:
1. Pick 2 points to define support line 1.
2. To finish, middle-click.

Concrete Detailing 238 Flooring

3. Pick 4 points to define support line 2.

4. To finish, middle-click.
5. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.
6. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.

Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.

Concrete Detailing 239 Flooring

Defining slab position
Use these options to define the position of the slab:

Property Description
The position of the slab relative to the origin
line picked when creating the slab.
The options are center of profile (default) or
center of seam.

Select the slab spacing and enter the

appropriate dimension. The options are seam
(default) or center to center.
If you select the seam option, the bottom
dimension is enabled. If you select the center-
to-center otion, the upper dimension is
enabled.
Slab offsets from support lines 1 and 2.

Vertical position of the slab.

The options are Top (default), Center or
Bottom.
Enter an optional offset value.

Projection type Defines how the slabs are spaced on a sloping

floor bay. See Defining projection type on page
240.

Concrete Detailing 240 Flooring

Defining projection type
Use the Projection type field to define how to handle slab spacing or seams on a sloping
floor bay. The options are Global (default), Support line 1, Support line 2, or Both support
lines.
• Global: the centers of the slabs remain constant, seam spacing adjusts.

• Support line 1: Seam spacing on support line 1 does not adjust (effect exaggerated
here):

• Support line 2: Seam spacing on support line 2 does not adjust (effect exaggerated
here):

Concrete Detailing 241 Flooring

• Both support lines: Seam spacing is calculated at the average plane position between
both support lines

Along this line, center to center and seam width are exactly as
entered in the dialog box.

Support line 2

Plane between support lines 1 and 2

Support line 1

Defining slab profile properties

Use the options on the Profiles tab to define a default profile for all the slabs in the floor.

Index list
Use the Index list to specify different profiles, seam width, and various cutting options for
specific slabs or seams. See also Adjustment type on page 243.
Input the values individually, or in a list:

Examples for slabs

If the origin point is the center of slab:

Concrete Detailing 242 Flooring

If the origin point is the center of seam:

Examples for seams

If the origin point is the center of slab:

If the origin point is the center of seam:

Adjustment type
Use to define the type of adjustment for the selected slab. The options are:
• Default – Use the default slab profile.
• Profile – Use the specific slab profile.
• Cut left side – Cut the left side of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses the default
slab profile.

Concrete Detailing 243 Flooring

• Cut right side – Cut the right side of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses the default
slab profile.
• Cut both sides – Cut both sides of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses the default
slab profile.
• Seam width – Adjust the seam width.

Profile/Seam width
Depending on which adjustment type option you choose, defines:
• The width of the default slab profile.
• The width of the specified profile.
• Seam width.

Modeling of slab area (88)

Use to create various types of concrete slabs, including fanned layouts. This component
creates slabs between two support lines, which can be polylines or sloped. To create a fanned
layout, use support lines that are curved or of different lengths.

Parts created
Concrete slabs.

Where to use

Situation More information

Slab area created
between two support
lines.

Fanned layouts of slab

area

Before you start

Create the two support lines with two or more points.

Concrete Detailing 244 Flooring

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Modeling of slab area (88) dialog box to define the following properties:

Tab Contents More information

Parameters Distance from the outer edges Defining slab area
of the slabs to the support properties on page 245
lines, slab direction and
distribution, fan angle.
Parts Slab properties.
Advanced Element and seam index
properties.

Picking order
1. Pick points to define the first support line. Click the middle mouse button outside the
point you just picked.
2. Pick points to define the second support line. Click the middle mouse button outside the
point you just picked.
3. Pick two points to indicate the direction of the slabs. The first point is the origin for the
slabs.

Defining slab area properties

Use these options to define slab properties:

Property Description
Distances from the slab to the support
lines.

Origin point Origin point of the slab. Origin point is

the point you pick after picking the
support line points.
Support line plane The options are Middle, Bottom, and Top.
Adjustment Defines which slab(s) to truncate or
delete, or how the slab area is generated.
The slab closest to the first support line’s
origin is the first.

Concrete Detailing 245 Flooring

 Property Description
The fan angle.

Slab Slab generation with polygon plate (61)

and Slab generation with points (62):
Parts tab on page 232
Standard spacing Slab spacing.
Advanced tab Use the Advanced tab to modify
individual slabs and seams. You can index
them and then define width or angle for
the indexed objects.
Index The number of the slab, seam, or fanned
seam that is different from the others.
Width The width of the indexed slab or seam.
Angle The fan angle of the indexed seam.

Sloping slab drainage

Sloping slab drainage creates a concrete slab topping and a drainage hole.

Objects created
• Drainage hole

Use for

Situation Description
Drainage holes with valley

and hip created.

Concrete Detailing 246 Flooring

Limitations
Slab topping does not adapt to slab chamfers. You need to define the slab chamfers and
topping chamfers separately.

Before you start

Create or split the slabs so that there is one drainage point in each slab.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab).
2. Pick a point to create the drainage hole.
The drainage hole is created automatically when the point is picked.

Part identification key

Part
Drainage hole

See also
Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab on page 247

Concrete Detailing 247 Flooring

Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to control the type, dimensions and properties of the drainage hole
in the Sloping slab drainage modeling tool.

Drainage hole type

Option Description
A drainage hole is not created.

A rectangular drainage hole is

created.

A round drainage hole is created.

Drainage hole dimensions

Option Description
Define the side dimensions
of the rectangular drainage
hole.

Define the diameter of the

round drainage hole.

Drainage hole properties

Option Description
Define slab inclination Select how the slab is inclined, by a combination of
by slope (S) or slope percentage (S%), and topping
thicknesses (d1, d2).
The Slope, d1, and d2 options are available
accordingly.
Slope Define the slope of the topping, for example, 0.01 (S)
or 2 (S%).

Concrete Detailing 248 Flooring

 Option Description
d1 Define the thickness of the topping at the drainage
point or at the hole.
d2 Define the thickness of the topping at the edge of the
slab or at the hip.
Create cast unit Select how the cast unit is created:
• Yes
Topping is part of the slab cast unit.
• No
Each part of the topping forms a cast unit.
• Topping
Topping is a separate cast unit.
Material Define the material of the topping by selecting it from
the material catalog.
Type Select whether a valley or a hip is created. If you
select Hip, you can only pick slab corners.

Hollow Core Opening Tool

Hollow Core Opening Tool creates holes and recesses to hollow core slabs. Hollow Core
Opening Tool works with single hollow core slabs, or with floors that are created with the
Modeling of floor bay (66) modeling tool.

Objects created
• Holes and recesses

Use for

Situation Description
Hollow core slab with small and large openings

Concrete Detailing 249 Flooring

Limitations
Hollow Core Opening Tool calculates the location for the openings based on the given
values and the slab profile data. If needed, you can use an external configuration file in XML
format to provide different rules for the openings and the slab profile data.
You can define small and large openings. Small openings are placed in the middle of the
hollow cores so that no webs are broken. Large openings break webs.

Before you start

Create a hollow core slab.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab).
2. Pick a position for the opening.

See also
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab on page 250
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab on page 253

Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the openings and recesses in the Hollow
Core Opening Tool modeling tool.

Option Description
Select the shape of the openings and recesses.
• Square - in the middle of the slab
• Round - in the middle of the slab
• At one end of the slab
• At both ends of the slab

Concrete Detailing 250 Flooring

 Option Description

Hollow positions If you select to add openings or recesses at one end or

at both ends of a slab, enter the positions of the
hollows that are cut.
The positions are numbered from left to right at the
start of the part. The part is viewed from the top in the
start-to-end direction. The openings and recesses are
created in the same voids at the end of the part.

Size Define the size of the opening in longitudinal and cross

direction, or the diameter for a round opening.
Opening width defines whether the opening is small or
large.
Opening Type Select the type of the opening.
Place exactly by point Select whether the opening is created exactly to the
picked position.
Centralize in zone Select how the center of an opening is centered
• By hollow:
The opening is centered to the hollow core.
• By web:
The opening is centered to the web.

Concrete Detailing 251 Flooring

 Option Description
Cut full width of hollow Select whether the opening is cut based on the
minimum width of hollows or the number of hollows.
To use this option, center the opening By hollow in the
Centralize in zone option.
Rules file (XML) Select the external XML file where you have defined
the opening and slab profiles.
Cutpart name Define a name for the cut part.
Define the recess depth.

Define the alignment for the opening.

Select whether the thick side part of the opening is

removed.

Concrete Detailing 252 Flooring

Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab
Use an external .xml file to define the openings and the slab profiles in the Hollow Core
Opening Tool modeling tool.

Example
An example Zones.xml file is located in ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures
\<version>\environments\common\system.

Hollow Core Lifting Loops

Hollow Core Lifting Loops creates lifters for hollow core slabs. Hollow Core Lifting Loops
works with single hollow core slabs, or with floors that are created with Modeling of floor
bay (66) modeling tool.

Objects created
• Lifters

Concrete Detailing 253 Flooring

Use for

Situation Description
Hollow core slab with recesses, hollow core
fillings and lifting devices.

Limitations
You also need a lifting device. The lifting device can be created as a custom part, or it can be
imported to the model. Alternatively, you can use an external configuration file in XML
format to define the properties for the recess, the lifting device and the slab.

Before you start

Create a hollow core slab and a lifting device.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab).
The recess and hollow core fillings are created.

See also
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab on page 254
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab on page 256
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab on page 256

Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab

Use the Basic settings tab to control the properties of the lifters and hollow core fillings in
the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.

Configuration file

Option Description
Configuration file Select the external XML file where you have defined the recess,
the lifting device and the slab profile properties.

Concrete Detailing 254 Flooring

 Option Description
Override Define whether the values on the Basic settings and Lifting
device settings tabs override the properties defined in the
external XML file.

Dimensions

Option Description
1 Define the minimum distance from the lifter insertion point to the end of the
slab.
2 Define the maximum distance from the lifter insertion point to the end of the
slab.
3 Define the minimum distance from the lifter insertion point to the edge of an
opening.
4 Define the minimum distance between two lifter insertion points.
5 Define the length of the hollow core filling.
6 Define the profile of the recess.
7 Define the depth of the recess.

Hollow core filling

Option Description
Use automatic fill Define whether the automatic hollow core filling profile is used.
profile
Profile Define the hollow core filling profile.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start Number Define a start number for the part position number.

Concrete Detailing 255 Flooring

 Option Description
Name Define a name for the lifter.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Class Use Class to group the lifters.
For example, you can display lifters of different classes in
different colors.

See also
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab on page 256
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab on page 256

Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab

Use the Lifting device settings tab to control the properties of the lifting device in the
Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.

Option Description
Lifter component Define the custom part that represents the actual lifting device.
Saved properties to use Select which saved properties to use for the lifting device custom
part.
Lifter max load Define the maximum load for the lifting device.
Rotation Select the rotation of the lifting device custom part around its
axis.
Angle Define the rotation angle of the lifting device custom part.
Up Direction Select the lifting device up direction in relation to the local
coordinate system.
Offset Define the offset of the lifting device in relation to the local
coordinate system in the corresponding directions.

See also
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab on page 254
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab on page 256

Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab

Use an external XML file to define the lifting device, the lifter, and the slab properties in the
Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 256 Flooring

Example

Floor Tool
Floor Tool creates a floor bay with optional insulation.

Objects created
• Hollow core slabs

Use for

Situation Description
Floor bay with insulation

Selection order
Make sure that you have defined the slab properties.
1. Pick the contour points of the floor bay.
The floor bay is automatically created when you close the polygon.

NOTE The list of picked contour points on the Bay contour tab and the list of slabs on the
Slab list tab are created when the slabs are created.

See also
Floor Tool: Slab properties tab on page 258
Floor Tool: Insulation tab on page 259

Concrete Detailing 257 Flooring

Floor Tool: Bay contour tab on page 259
Floor Tool: Slab list tab on page 260

Floor Tool: Slab properties tab

Use the Slab properties tab to control the profile, material and location of the hollow core
slabs in the Floor Tool modeling tool.

Slab attributes

Option Description
Profile Define the profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.
Name Define a name for the slab.
Material Define the material grade by selecting it from the material
catalog.
Class Define the part class number.
Prefix Define the part prefix.
Start number Define the start number for the cast unit.
Cut slab ends Define whether the slab ends are cut or not.
If you select Yes, define the minimum end angle for the
slabs.
Rotation Select an option to rotate the slab.
Vertical location Define the offset location in the vertical direction.
Offset Define the offset in the vertical direction.
Minimum end angle Define the minimum end angle for the slabs.
If the line to which the slab ends has a bigger angle than
the defined minimum end angle, the part will be aligned
to the line.

Additional attributes

Option Description
Exposure Class Define the exposure class for the hollow core slab.
The exposure class will be saved as a user-defined
attribute.
Relative strength Define the relative strength of the hollow core slab.
The relative strength will be saved as a user-defined
attribute.
Fire rating Define the fire rating for the hollow core slab.
The fire rating will be saved as a user-defined attribute.
User-defined attributes User-defined attributes are located in the
FloorTool.ini file.

Concrete Detailing 258 Flooring

Slab direction

Option Description
Slab direction Define the direction of the slab.
If you select Angle, you need to pick points in the model
to define the new direction. The angle you have picked is
shown in the Angle field. You can also define the angle
directly in the field to rotate the slabs.
Note that picking two points does not change the local
+X direction.

Floor Tool: Insulation tab

Use the Insulation tab to control the insulation properties of the hollow core slabs in the
Floor Tool modeling tool.

First define whether to create insulation or not. Insulation is created separately for each slab.

Insulation

Option Description
Name Define a name for the insulation.
Material Define a material grade by selecting it from the
material catalog.
Thickness Define the thickness of the insulation.
Class Define the part class number.
Offset at slab start/end Define the offset between the slab start/end
positions and the corresponding positions in the
insulation parts.
Left/Right offset Define the offset between the slab and the
insulation for the rightmost and leftmost slab.

Concrete Detailing 259 Flooring

Floor Tool: Bay contour tab
Use the Bay contour tab to control the coordinates of the picked contour points and the
horizontal offset of the lines connecting the contour points in the Floor Tool modeling tool.
If the coordinates are not visible on the tab, click the Get button.

You need to create the hollow core slabs before using the Bay countour tab.

Bay contour properties

Option Description
XY-constant Z Define the Z coordinate for all contour points at the same
specific height.
XYZ (sloping floor) Define the Z constant for each contour point separately.
The floor may be sloped.
Offset method Define the offset method.
Default end offset Define the default end offset.
Default side offset Define the default side offset.

Bay contour table

The table lists the contour points showing their X, Y, and Z coordinates. You can modify the Z
coordinate in the table only if you have selected XYZ (sloping floor). You can modify the
Horizontal offset on all rows of the table.
The table also shows the lines connecting the points. You can only modify the Horizontal
offset. Entering a positive value enlarges the slab area and entering a negative value shrinks
the slab area.

Floor Tool: Slab list tab

Use the Slab list tab to list all the hollow core slabs created in the Floor Tool modeling tool.
If the slab list is not visible on the tab, click the Get button.

Slab properties

Option Description
Slab number Shows the order of the hollow core slabs starting from
the first picked point.
Width Shows the width of a narrowed slab.
Narrowed from Define whether the slab is narrowed. The options are:
• not narrowed (default)
• Right side
• Left side
Type Define the slab type.
• Use Slab for normal hollow core slabs.

Concrete Detailing 260 Flooring

 Option Description
• Use PIP for a precast infill piece.
• Use GAP for an empty space between the slabs. You
do not need to define a profile when you select this
option.
• Use CIP to create a concrete part using the width
defined in the Width column. The width range that
you can use is defined in the FloorTool.ini file.
The slabs listed in the FloorTool.ini file can
only have a width that is inside the defined range. The
slabs that are not listed can have any width. The
value you give is rounded down to the nearest
allowed value.
Profile Define the profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.

You can Add and Delete slabs, and move them Up and Down in the list by using the buttons
on the left. To restore the default values, click Restore defaults.

Floor Layout
Floor Layout creates floors built of precast filigree and hollow core slabs. The floors may
contain several layers, such as precast slabs, insulation and a cast-in-place topping. Floor
Layout is most useful for non-rectangular floors that contain one or more openings that split
slabs into many pieces, and when slab widths are not constant on the whole floor area. You
can modify the floors using direct modification.

Objects created
• Slabs
• Insulation
• Cast-in-place topping

Concrete Detailing 261 Flooring

Use for

Situation Description
Create floor structures that have layers, for
example, hollow core slabs at the bottom,
insulation as the middle layer, and cast-in-
place topping.

Selection order
1. Pick the corner points of the floor.
You can pick the points at grid lines or the reference points of supporting parts. You can
change the offsets later.
The default slab direction is from the first (P1) point to the second (P2) point. You can
change this later if needed.

2. Click the middle mouse button to create the floor.

Concrete Detailing 262 Flooring

Floor Layout: Layer tab

Use the Layer tab to control the layer type, profile, and how the layer is created in the Floor
Layout modeling tool.

Layer list

Layers Description
The layer list shows the current layers of the floor. The first layer in
the list is the top layer and the last layer is the bottom layer. In the
example image on the left, the FILIGREE layer is the top layer and
the CIP layer is the bottom layer.
Use the buttons to do the following:

• Click to add a new layer.

• Click to remove the selected layer.

• Click to change the order of the layers by moving

the selected layer up or down in the list.

Layer properties
Select a layer in the layer list to define the layer properties.

Concrete Detailing 263 Flooring

 Option Description
Layer name Enter a name for the layer. This is the layer name shown in the layer
list. The name is also shown in the direct modification toolbar when
you are modifying offsets .
This name is not visible in the model so you can enter any suitable
name.
Layer type Select the layer type. The Precast layer is the primary layer and any
insulation parts are added to precast units. The parts created for a
Cast in place layer are not added to any other cast unit.
Create layer as Select how the layer parts are created: as beam parts, custom parts,
or a single part.
Layer component When the layer parts are created as custom parts, you can select a
component and the component attributes.
Component
attributes
Layer thickness or When the layer parts are created as beam parts or as a single part,
profile you can select the profile or thickness of the layer parts.
With parametric profiles, you can replace the width of the profile
with the text [W]. When you do this, the beam is never cut but the
desired width is achieved by setting the profile name based on the
slab width.
For example, the profile could be BL80*[W].
Rotation Select the rotation of the layer parts.
Part name Define the name, class, material, part prefix and start number of the
layer parts.
Class
Material
Part prefix, Start no
Cast unit prefix,
Start no

Floor Layout: General tab

Use the General tab to control the default part and gap width, depth position of the layers,
and the direction for lining up the slabs in the Floor Layout modeling tool.

Option Description
Default part width Enter the default width for the slabs in the primary layer.
If you define the width of an individual slab in the slab part
properties, the Default part width value is not used.

Concrete Detailing 264 Flooring

 Option Description
Default gap width Enter the default seam gap width in the primary layer.
If you define the width of an individual gap, the Default gap width
value is not used.
Depth position Select how the layers are positioned in relation to the plane of
input points.

Line up direction Select the direction for the slabs. By default, the width of the last
slab may differ from the width of the other slabs.

Customizing allowed slab width

You can customize the allowed slab widths in the FloorLayout.ini file. This file can be
located under the model folder or in any of the folders defined in the XS_FIRM,
XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options.
The image below shows an example of the FloorLayout.ini file:

Concrete Detailing 265 Flooring

Floor Layout: Advanced tab

Use the Advanced tab to control the minimum angles, and the width and length of the slabs
in the Floor Layout modeling tool.

Option Description
Minimum end angle Controls how the slab ends are modeled.
Minimum start angle When the angle of the floor edge is smaller than the minimum
angle, you can select a suitable option from the list to make the
slab end straight.

Minimum slab width. Slabs narrower than the minimum width are
not created.

Concrete Detailing 266 Flooring

 Option Description
Minimum slab length. Slabs shorter than the minimum length are
not created.

Minimum neck width of the slabs. If the width of the neck is less
than the minimum neck width defined, the slab is split to two slabs
and the neck is left out. Otherwise, the slab is created as one slab.

Floor Layout: Detailing tab

Use the Detailing tab to select the components that are applied to all slabs in the floor.

Option Description
Component name Select a component that is applied to the slabs in the floor.
Component attr file Select the settings that are used with the component you have
name selected.
The list contains all the files that are available for the selected
component.

Adding a component to the component name list

The component name list is empty by default. You can add components to the list:
1. Select Add new from the list.
The Detailing component data dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter a suitable name in the Name in dropdown box.

3. Click to open the Applications and Components catalog.

4. Select a component and click OK.
The component name or number is added to the Component name box.
5. Click OK.

Concrete Detailing 267 Flooring

When you have added the needed components, the names of the components are shown in
the component name list as shown in the example image below. Select a component from
the list:

The list is stored in the \attributes folder under the model folder.
If you want to predefine the list to contain your favorite components in any new models, you
can copy the LayoutConfiguration.datx file from the \attributes folder
under the model folder to any of the folders defined in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or
XS_SYSTEM.

Concrete Detailing 268 Flooring

Floor Layout: User defined tab

Use the User defined tab to set the user-defined attribute values for the slabs in the Floor
Layout modeling tool.
If you have defined the user-defined attributes in the part properties dialog box and want to
use those values, leave the User defined tab empty.
The content of the tab may vary depending on your environment, see below how to
customize the content.

Customizing the User defined tab

You can customize the content of the User defined tab using the
floorlayout.objects.inp file. Note that you cannot create new user-defined
attributes with the file. The user-defined attributes on the tab are existing user-defined
attributes that have been defined in the objects.inp file. The
floorlayout.objects.inp file has the same format as the objects.inp file.
The floorlayout.objects.inp file can be located in any of the folders set in the
XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options. The file is never read from the
model folder.
Below is an example of the floorlayout.objects.inp file:

Concrete Detailing 269 Flooring

Floor Layout: Modifying a floor

You can use direct modification to modify the floor. Before you start, ensure that the Direct

modification switch is active. Select the floor to display the direct modification
toolbar.
To modify the floor, select the appropriate command from the toolbar.

Button Description
Add a polygonal opening.
Add a rectangular opening.

Add a break line to split the slab into two slabs.

Modify the openings or exterior boundary of the floor. This command is active
by default.
Make the floor warped by offsetting one or more vertices of the exterior
boundary polygon from the plane.
Modify the offsets at floor boundaries

Modify the layout of the floor:

• Modify the width or profile of any of the slabs in the floor.
• Modify the side of the cut when the slab is cut to a smaller width.
• Modify the gaps between the slabs.
• Modify the direction of the slabs.
• Modify the order of slabs when the slabs do not the have the same width or
profiles.
Add or modify the detailing components that are applied only to certain slabs in
the floor layout. The detailing components are listed on the Detailing tab.
You can apply the same detailing component settings to all slabs in the floor
layout using the floor layout attributes.

Adding a polygonal opening

1. Click .
2. Pick the corner points of the opening.

Concrete Detailing 270 Flooring

 You can pick the points at grid lines or you can pick the reference points of supporting
parts. You can change the offsets later.

Adding a rectangular opening

1. Click .
2. Pick the corner points of the opening.

Concrete Detailing 271 Flooring

 You can pick the points at grid lines or you can pick the reference points of supporting
parts. You can change the offsets later.

Adding a break line to split the slab into two slabs

1. Click .
2. Pick the end points of the break line.

Concrete Detailing 272 Flooring

Modifying the openings and exterior boundary of the floor

1. The button is active by default.

The handles are shown for the exterior boundary and for all openings in the floor.
2. Do any of the following:
• To move an edge, drag any of the edge lines. Hold down the left mouse button when
dragging.

Concrete Detailing 273 Flooring

• To move a corner point, drag the handle in the corner.

• To add new points to the edge, drag the handle in the middle of the edge.

Concrete Detailing 274 Flooring

• To delete any of the points, select the handle in the corner and press the Delete key.
• To make the floor warped, offset the vertices of the exterior boundary so that all
vertices are not in the same plane.
Drag a handle normally to move the vertices in the original floor plane.

Hold down the Alt key while dragging to move the vertex perpendicular to the floor
plane.

Concrete Detailing 275 Flooring

 Hold down the Alt and Shift keys to move the vertex both in the plane and off from
the plane by snapping to any point in the model.

Modifying the offset at floor boundaries

1. Click .
The handles for modifying the offset are shown. If there are offsets, the offset dimensions
are also shown.
2. To adjust the offset, do one of the following:
• Drag the edge offset lines.

Concrete Detailing 276 Flooring

 • Select one or more offset lines by holding down the Shift key.
When you have the offset lines selected, right-click on any of the selected lines.
Enter the offset value to the toolbar that is displayed and click .

Note that when you use the offset command, the direct modification toolbar shows the floor
layout layers. Each layer may have different offsets. You can select which layers to modify.
The simplest way is to select all layers and have the offsets equal in each layer.

Concrete Detailing 277 Flooring

Concrete Detailing 278 Flooring
Modifying the layout of the floor

1. Click .
The following direct modification elements are shown:

2. To modify the layout of the floor, do any of the following:

• To modify slab width, do one of the following:
• To move all seams, select one seam and start dragging.
• To add a new seam, select a seam, hold down the Ctrl key and start dragging.
When you stop dragging and release the mouse key, a new seam is added to that
location.
• To make one slab smaller, select a seam, hold down the Alt key and start
dragging. The slab on the left or right side is made smaller and all slabs on the
other side will move with the seam.
• To modify the profile, width, and cut side of a slab, right-click the slab handle.

When the profile of the slab is fixed (not parametric), the slab is cut on either side
when the width is smaller than the original width. The Default cut side is leading

Concrete Detailing 279 Flooring

 edge for the first slab and trailing edge for all others in relation to the layout
direction.
You can modify the properties of multiple slabs at the same time by holding down
the Shift key when selecting slabs.
• To modify the gap width between the slabs, do one of the following:
• Drag the end of the gap dimension.

• Right-click a seam line handle, enter the width and click .

You can modify multiple gaps at same time by holding down the Shift key when
selecting seam line handles.
• To move a slab or change the order of slabs, drag the slab handles.

Concrete Detailing 280 Flooring

• To change the direction of slabs, drag the slab direction handle.

Concrete Detailing 281 Flooring

 • To remove a slab from the layout, select the slab handles and press the Delete key.

Adding and modifying detailing components

1. Click to open the detailing toolbar.

2. Do any of the following to add, remove or modify the detailing strips that control how
and to which slabs the detailing components are added in the floor:

Button/ Description
Option
Add a new detailing strip. Pick the start and end points for the strip.
In practice, the selected detailing component will be added into the slabs
that the strip touches, see the example image below.
You can also add new detailing strips by dragging an existing strip and
holding down the Ctrl key.
Delete a detailing strip. Select the strip that you want to delete.
You can select multiple strips by holding down the Shift key.

Concrete Detailing 282 Flooring

 Button/ Description
Option
Component Select the actual detailing component from the Component name list.
name
The content of the list may vary depending on your environment.
You can also add new components to the list by selecting the Add new
option. Note that you can only add detailing components that use one input
part.

Component Select the detailing component attributes that are used for the slab.
attribute file
Note that the content of the list varies depending on the component that
name
you have selected.

Modify the detailing component and/or attribute file of the detailing strip.
Select the detailing strip and select the component name and/or attribute
file from the list. Click the button to modify the selected detailing strips.
You can select multiple strips by holding down the Shift key.
Close the detailing toolbar to continue the other modifications of the floor
layout.
Note that the detailing toolbar is also closed when you select any other
modification tool in the Floor Layout direct modification toolbar.

The image below shows an example of a floor layout containing three detailing strips.

Concrete Detailing 283 Flooring

Floor Layout CIP Filler
Floor Layout CIP Filler creates CIP filler parts into the empty areas in floors created with the
Floor Layout modeling tool. The empty areas are spaces created by offsets around the
exterior and interior boundaries. There may also be empty areas when the slab is too narrow
to be created with the Floor Layout modeling tool.

Floor Layout CIP filler properties

Option Description
Minimum width Minimum width of the part.
If the empty space is smaller than this width, the part is not created
in this location.
Cast unit prefix, Cast unit prefix of the CIP filler part
Start no
Cast unit start number of the CIP filler part
Name, Class, Define the name, class, material and finish of the CIP filler parts.
Material, Finish

Concrete Detailing 284 Concrete stairs

1.7 Concrete stairs
Tekla Structures includes the following tools you can use to create concrete stairs and
stairwells:
• Concrete stairs (7) on page 285
• Concrete stairs (65) on page 287
• Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) on page 302
• Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) on page 306

Concrete stairs (7)

Creates concrete stairs.

Where to use

Situation More information

A concrete staircase connected to
two concrete slabs.

Before you start

Create two concrete slabs to connect the stairs to.

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Concrete stairs (7) dialog box to define the following properties:

Tab Contents More information

Parameters Run and rise dimensions, Defining stair properties on
stair slab thickness page 286
Part Stairs properties
Notch Tolerance between the Defining stair properties on
stairs and adjacent parts page 286

Picking order
1. Pick a point to indicate the level of the lowest step.

Concrete Detailing 285 Concrete stairs

2. Pick a point to indicate the level of the highest step.
3. Click two parts to which to connect the stairs. Tekla Structures fits the stairs to these
parts using the values in the Tolerance fields on the Notch tab.
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the stairs.

Defining stair properties

The illustration below shows the stairs properties that you can define.

Length

Length at top

Tolerances

Length at bottom

Slab thickness

Width

Height

In the Approximate dimension list box, select whether you want to specify the rise (Height)
or the run (Length).

Defining stair tolerances

Tolerances are the gaps that Tekla Structures leaves between the ends of the stairs and
adjacent structures. Use the Notch tab to define length, height, and width tolerances.

Concrete Detailing 286 Concrete stairs

Concrete stairs (65)
Concrete stairs (65) creates precast stairs with optional landings, ridges, stringers, and anti-
skid and kick plate profiles. It contains five different step shapes and options to create round
or chamfered step edges.

Objects created
• Stairs
• Landings
• Ridges
• Stringers
• Anti-skid
• Kick plate

Use for

Situation Description
Staircase with
• square step shape
• stringers on both sides
• top and bottom landings

Staircase with
• chamfered step corners
• ridges on both sides

Concrete Detailing 287 Concrete stairs

 Situation Description
Staircase with
• rounded step corners
• anti-skid profile
• bottom landing

Staircase with
• square step shape
• rounded step corners
• ridges on both sides
• anti-skid and kick plate
profiles

Selection order
Selection order depends on the selected Creation method option on the Stairs tab.
When Creation method is set to Default:
1. Pick the first point to indicate the start point of stairs.
2. Pick the second point to indicate the direction of stairs.

The stairs are created automatically.

Concrete Detailing 288 Concrete stairs

Part identification key

Part
Landings
Stringers
Ridges
Kick plates
Steps
Anti-skids

See also
Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab on page 289
Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab on page 292
Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab on page 294
Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab on page 295
Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab on page 298
Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab on page 300
Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab on page 301
Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab on page 301

Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab

Use the Stairs tab to define how the stairs are created and what are the dimensions of the
stairs in the Concrete stairs (65) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 289 Concrete stairs

Creation method

Option Description
Creation method Select the creation method of the stairs. Creation
method defines how many and which points you need
to pick when you create the stairs.
• Default
Number of steps is calculated automatically using
the vertical distance between the two input
points.
• One point - N & L & H: define N, L, and H
(number, length, and height of the steps).
• Two points - N & L: define N and L.
Height of the steps is calculated automatically
using the vertical distance between the two input
points.
• Two points - N & H: define N and H.
Length of the steps is calculated automatically
using the horizontal distance between the two
input points.
• Two points - L & H: define L and H.
Number of steps is calculated automatically using
the vertical distance between the two input
points.
• Two points - N: define N.
Height and length of steps is calculated
automatically using the horizontal and vertical
distance between the two input points. You can
define the length of the top step.
No of steps, N Define the number of steps, if the Two points - L & H
option is not selected.
Position Define the horizontal position of the staircase, relative
to the line joining the picked points.
Distance Enter a distance to move the stairs in the horizontal
direction from the line joining the picked points. The
selected Position option has an effect on this
dimension.

Concrete Detailing 290 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Rotation Define the angle between the line joining the steps
and the line joining the selected points.

Cast unit type Select the cast unit type:

• Precast
• Cast in place

Stair dimensions

Description
Define height of the step.
Define length of the step.

Define length of the top step.

Define height of the top step.

Concrete Detailing 291 Concrete stairs

 Description

Define width of the top corbel.

Define slope from the corbel to the underside of the stairs.

Define thickness of the slab.

Define chamfering for the underside of stairs.

Define chamfer or radius values.

Define height of the bottom step.

Define height of the stair foot.

Define chamfering for the bottom of stairs.

Define slope from the foot nose to the foot base.

Define length of the bottom cut.

Define length of the stair foot.

Define width of the staircase, including stringers.

Create foot
Define whether a foot is created at the bottom of the stairs.

Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab

Use the Step shapes tab to define the shape of steps in the Concrete stairs (65) modeling
tool.

All other steps/Last step at foot

Select the step shape. You can define the shape of the last step at the bottom if you set Last
step same as other step to No.

Concrete Detailing 292 Concrete stairs

Option Description
Default
Beveled
From the list below the step shape options, select
whether you want to enter a dimension or an angle.
AutoDefaults can change this option.

Straight step

Top straight, bottom beveled

Enter two dimensions.

Top beveled, bottom straight

Enter the vertical dimension and then select whether
you want to enter an angle or a horizontal dimension.

Top and bottom staight

Enter vertical dimensions and then select whether you
want to enter an angle or a horizontal dimension.

Concrete Detailing 293 Concrete stairs

out
Select the shape of the step front edge and enter the required dimensions.
• Default
• Radius: Creates rounded edge.

• Chamfer: Creates chamfered edge.

• No: Creates square edge.

in
Select the shape of the step inner corner and enter the required dimensions.
• Default
• Radius: Creates rounded inner corner.

• Chamfer: Creates chamfered inner corner.

• No: Creates square inner corner.

Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab

Use the Landings tab to create top and/or bottom landings in the Concrete stairs (65)
modeling tool.

Create landings
Define whether one or two landings are created, or whether there are no landings.

Concrete Detailing 294 Concrete stairs

Landing dimensions and extensions

Description
Define thickness of the bottom landing.
Define length of the bottom landing.
Define length of the top landing.
Define thickness of the top landing.
Define left and right extensions of the bottom landing.

Define left and right extensions of the top landing.

Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab

Use the Ridges tab to create horizontal and/or vertical ridges on both sides or only on the
other side of the stairs in the Concrete stairs (65) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 295 Concrete stairs

Dimensions

Description
Define thickness of the vertical ridge.
Define width of the vertical ridge.
Define width of the horizontal ridge.
Define thickness/height of the horizontal ridge.

Horizontal ridges

Part Description
Create Define whether horizontal ridges are created.

Concrete Detailing 296 Concrete stairs

 Part Description
Create at foot Define whether horizontal ridges are created at the
foot of the stairs.
This option works in the same way as the Create
option.

Inside chamfer Select the type of the inside chamfer and enter the
required dimensions.

Corner chamfer Select the type of the corner chamfer and enter the
required dimensions.

Slope Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope

makes the ridge inclined.

Foot corner chamfer Define whether corner chamfers are created at the
stair foot.

Top and foot ridges

Define the horizontal ridge length at the stair top step and at the stair foot. When no foot is
created, vertical ridges continue to the bottom level of the stairs.

Concrete Detailing 297 Concrete stairs

Vertical ridges

Part Description
Create Define whether vertical ridges are created.

Slope Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope

makes the ridge inclined.

Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab

Use the Stringers tab to create stringers and ridges on the left, right, or both sides of the
stairs in the Concrete stairs (65) modeling tool.

Parts

Part Description
Create stringers Define whether stringers are created.
Create top ridge Select an option to create top ridges.

Create bottom ridge Select an option to create bottom ridges.

Concrete Detailing 298 Concrete stairs

 Part Description
Slope Use to incline the inner surface of the stringers.

You can define the slope using an angle or a

dimension.
Inside chamfer Define whether the inside edge of stringer is
chamfered or not.
Outside chamfer Define whether the outside edge of stringer is
chamfered or not.
Stringer height Define how the stringer height is determined.

Dimensions

Description
Define height of the stringer bottom ridge.

Define horizontal offset of the bottom ridge from the

bottom step.
Define height of the stringer top ridge.

Concrete Detailing 299 Concrete stairs

 Description
Define width of the stringer.

Define the difference in height that is the perpendicular

distance between the step edge and stringer edge.
You can enter this dimension if Stringer height is Diff in
height.
Define total height of the stringer.
You can enter this dimension if Stringer height is Default
or Total height.

Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab

Use the Anti-skid and Kick plate tabs to create slip resistant surfaces in the Concrete stairs
(65) modeling tool.

Parts

Part Description
Creation anti-skid Define whether anti-skids or kick plates are created.
Creation kick plate
Create anti-skid on foot Define whether anti-skids are created at the stair
foot.
Create cutout Define whether you want to create cutouts with the
anti-skid profile.
By default, the cutouts are not created.
Include in cast unit Define whether anti-skids or kick plates are
included in cast unit.
Profile Define the anti-skid or kick plate profile by
selecting it from the profile catalog.
Rotation Select an option to rotate the anti-skid or kick plate
profile.

Anti-skid/kick plate position

Concrete Detailing 300 Concrete stairs

 Description
Define anti-skid or kick plate distance from the left edge of
the step.
Define anti-skid or kick plate distance from the right edge
of the step.

Description
Define distance from the step front edge.

Define depth for the anti-skid or kick plate.

Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the properties of different stair parts in the Concrete stairs
(65) modeling tool.

Part attributes

Option Description
Material Define the material grade for the part.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.
Name Define a name for the part.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and
reports.
Class Define the part class number.

Concrete Detailing 301 Concrete stairs

Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab
Use the UDA tab to provide additional information about the parts created in the Concrete
stairs (65) modeling tool.

TIP The user-defined attributes are case sensitive. Check the correct spelling of an attribute
from the objects.inp file.

Stairwells and elevator shafts (90)

Creates a rectangular stairwell or elevator shaft to represent the structure in the design
stage. When you detail the structure, you can apply seams, connections, and reinforcement
to complete the details of a stairwell or elevator shaft. This component uses the Concrete
stairs (65) on page 287 component for creating stairs.

Parts created
• Wall panels
• Landings (optional)
• Flights of stairs (optional)
• Roof slab (optional)
• Openings (optional)

Where to use

Situation More information

A stairwell over four floors
created using the default options.
As shown, the points picked and
the dimensions on the Stairs and
landings tab determine the
length of the stairwell.
Walls consist of one or more
precast concrete panels.

First point picked

Second point picked

Concrete Detailing 302 Concrete stairs

 Situation More information
Stairwells always contain a first
floor and a top floor. Indicate the
number of additional floors on
the Plan view tab, Levels field.
This stairwell has 2 additional
floors, for a total of 4 floors.

Top floor

Additional floor

Additional floor

1st or ground floor

Elevator shaft created by
selecting the Elevator shaft
option on the Stairs and
landings tab, Type field, for all
floors.

Limitations
The minimum floor height between floors is 200 mm.

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define the following
properties:

Tab Contents More information

Plan view Number of floors or levels. Defining stairwell properties
on page 304
Position of picked points.
Length and width of shaft.
Wall panel dimensions.
Openings Opening dimensions for Each wall may have a single
each wall panel and for the opening, or no opening.

Concrete Detailing 303 Concrete stairs

 Tab Contents More information
first, additional, and top
floors.
Stairs and Stair and landing options
landings and dimensions.
Option to create elevator
shaft (in the Type list
boxes).
Attributes Basic part properties for
walls, stairs, and landings.
Option to use the saved
properties from the
Concrete stairs (65) on page
287 component for the
first, additional, and top
stairs.

Picking order
1. On the Plan view tab, check the Position option. The default is in the middle of walls 3
and 4.

2. Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 3.

3. Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 4.

Defining stairwell properties

Use the Plan view tab in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define the
properties of the stairwell or elevator shaft.

Defining number of floors and height

To define the number of levels and floor heights, enter a height for each floor level in the
Levels field, for example:

You can also define negative floor levels, for example:

You can also use multiplier to define many floors, as in the following US imperial example:

Concrete Detailing 304 Concrete stairs

Tekla Structures also uses these values to calculate the total height of the stairwell.

Defining position
To create the stairwell or elevator shaft, you pick two points in the model. Use the Position
field to define the location of the stairwell or elevator shaft relative to these points. The
options are:
• Middle (default)
• Left
• Right
Enter the offset distance from the selected position. Here, the offset is from the middle of
wall.

Defining length and width

To manually define the total length and total width of the stairwell or elevator shaft, enter
the following values:
L - total length
W - total width
Leave both fields blank to have Tekla Structures automatically calculate these dimensions
from the the points picked:

First point picked.

Second point picked.

Concrete Detailing 305 Concrete stairs

 Total width, W

Total length, L

NOTE The dimensions defined on the Stairs and landings tab may override the total length or width
that is automatically calculated or that you manually enter.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95)

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) creates reinforced concrete stairs.

Objects created
• Stairs
• Landings (optional)
• Ridges (optional)
• Stringers (optional)
• Anti-skid (optional)
• Main bars and stirrups of stair reinforcement (Bar A - Bar L tabs) (optional)
• Meshes in stairs and landings (optional)
• Mesh bars (optional)
• Anchor bars (optional)
• Landing end bars (optional)

Use for

Situation Description
Reinforced concrete stairs.

Concrete Detailing 306 Concrete stairs

 Situation Description
Reinforced concrete stairs with
chamfered steps, ridges and
stringers.

Reinforced concrete stairs with

reinforced landings.

Selection order
1. Pick the first point to indicate the start point of the stairs.
2. Pick the second point to indicate the direction of the stairs.
3. Select any number of parts to be cut by the stairs (optional).
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the stairs.

Concrete Detailing 307 Concrete stairs

See also
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Parameters tab on page 309
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Parts tab on page 310
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Stairs and landings tab on page 311
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Ridges tab on page 313
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Stringers tab on page 315
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Anti-skid tab on page 316
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar A tab on page 317
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar B tab on page 317
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar C tab on page 319
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar D tab on page 320
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar F tab on page 323
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar E tab on page 321
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar G tab on page 324
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar H tab on page 325
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar I tab on page 326

Concrete Detailing 308 Concrete stairs

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar J tab on page 327
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar K tab on page 328
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar L tab on page 329
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh picture tab on page 330
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh attributes tab on page 331
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh bars tab on page 332
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bottom anchor bars tab on page 332
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Top anchor bars tab on page 333
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Z anchor bars tab on page 334
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Landing end bars tab on page 334
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Configuration on page 335

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the shape of the stairs, number of steps, stair creation
method and the stairs width in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Stair dimensions

Description
1 Horizontal dimension of the steps
area.
2 Vertical dimension of the steps area.
3 Step length.
4 Step height.
5 Shape options for stair bottom.
6 Shape options for stair top.
7 Stair width.

Stair creation method

Option Description
P1 P2 step length Create stairs between points P1 and P2.
Stair dimension are defined by the distance between P1 and P2
and step length.
P1 P2 step height Create stairs between points P1 and P2.
Stair dimension are defined by the distance between P1 and P2
and step height.

Concrete Detailing 309 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
P1 step length step Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
height N steps
Stair dimensions are defined by P1 and step height, length and
number of steps.
P2 step length step Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
height N steps
Stair dimensions are defined by P2 and step height, length and
number of steps.
P1 horizontal and Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
vertical step distance
Stair dimensions are defined by P1 and horizontal and vertical
step distance.
P2 horizontal and Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
vertical step distance
Stair dimensions are defined by P2 and horizontal and vertical
step distance.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the material, name, class, positioning, cast unit type and step
chamfering in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Step chamfer settings

Option Description
Middle for all All steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps
settings.
Bottom different Bottom step is chamfered according to the 1st step at
bottom settings.
All other steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps
settings.
Top different Top step is chamfered according to the Last top step
settings.
All other steps are chamfered according to the Middle steps
settings.
Bottom and top different Bottom step is chamfered according to the 1st step at
bottom settings.
Top step chamfered are according to the Last top step
settings. All other steps are chamfered according to the
Middle steps settings.

Step chamfer settings are set in the same way for 1st step at bottom, Middle steps and
Last top step.

Concrete Detailing 310 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Size of step cut is defined by the distance.

Size of step cut is defined by the angle.

Corner chamfers types

Corner chamfers 1. and 2. can be defined by the Radius x or by the sides of the Chamfer x,
y.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Stairs and landings tab

Use the Stairs and landings tab to control the size and type of the bottom landing and the
top landing in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Bottom landing cut option

Option Description
Bottom landing with no cut.

Bottom landing with cut defined by its length and distance

from the top side of landing.

Concrete Detailing 311 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Bottom landing with cut defined by its length and distance
from the bottom side of landing.

Bottom landing with L shape cut defined by its three

dimensions and distance from the top side of landing.

Bottom landing cut defined by a profile and its position in

landing.

Top landing cut option

Option Description
Top landing with no cut.

Top landing with cut defined by its length and distance from the
top side of landing.

Top landing with cut defined by its length and distance from the
bottom side of landing.

Top landing with L shape cut defined by its three dimensions and
distance from the top side of landing.

Top landing cut defined by a profile and its position in landing.

Concrete Detailing 312 Concrete stairs

Landing dimensioning

Description
Use the top view setting to define the dimensions of the
bottom landing and the top landing.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Ridges tab

Use the Ridges tab to create horizontal and/or vertical ridges on both sides or only on one
side of the stairs in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Dimensions

Description
1 Thickness of the vertical ridge.
2 Width of the vertical ridge.
3 Width of the horizontal ridge.
4 Thickness/height of the horizontal ridge.

Concrete Detailing 313 Concrete stairs

Horizontal ridges

Option Description
Create Define whether horizontal ridges are created.

Create at foot Define whether horizontal ridges are created at the foot of the
stairs.
This option works in the same way as the Create option.
Chamfering 1 Inside chamfer: Select the type of the inside chamfer and enter
the required dimensions.
2 Corner chamfer: Select the type of the corner chamfer and enter
the required dimensions.
3 Slope: Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope makes
the ridge inclined.
Foot corner chamfer Define whether corner chamfers are created at the stair foot.

Concrete Detailing 314 Concrete stairs

Vertical ridges

Option Description
Create Define whether vertical ridges are created.

Slope Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope makes the ridge
inclined.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Stringers tab

Use the Stringers tab to create the stringers and ridges on the left, right, or both sides of the
stairs in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 315 Concrete stairs

 Description
1 Height of the stringer bottom ridge.
2 Horizontal offset of the bottom ridge from the bottom
step.
3 Height of the stringer top ridge.
4 Width of the stringer.

Slope Use to incline the inner surface of the stringers.

You can define the slope using an angle or a dimension.

Inside chamfer Define whether the inside edge of stringer is chamfered
or not.
Outside chamfer Define whether the outside edge of stringer is
chamfered or not.

Stringer height

Stringer height based on the total height or distance from inner/outer step corner.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Anti-skid tab

Use the Anti-skid tab to create slip resistant surfaces in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95)
modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 316 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Creation anti-skid Define whether anti-skids are created.
Create anti-skid on Define whether anti-skids are created at the stair foot.
foot
Create cutout Define whether you want to create cutouts with the anti-skid
profile. By default, the cutouts are not created.
Include in cast unit Define whether anti-skids are included in the cast unit.
Profile Define the anti-skid profile by selecting it from the profile catalog.
Rotation Select an option to rotate the anti-skid profile.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar A tab

Use the Bar A tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of

the reinforcing bar group.

Concrete Detailing 317 Concrete stairs

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar B tab
Use the Bar B tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Bar B bottom ending options

Define geometry and concrete cover thickness of the bar B bottom ending.

Option Description
Bar B simple bottom ending.

Bar B bottom ending bent once to fit the bottom

footing of the stairs.

Bar B bottom ending bent twice to fit the bottom

footing of the stairs.

Bar B bottom ending bent up to three times to fit the

bottom footing of the stairs.

Bar B top ending options

Define geometry and concrete cover thickness of the bar B top ending.

Concrete Detailing 318 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Bar B simple top ending.

Bar B top ending bent once to fit the top geometry of

the stairs.

Bar B top ending bent twice to fit the top geometry of

the stairs. Last leg length is defined by the cover
thickness.

Bar B top ending bent twice to fit the top geometry of

the stairs.

Reinforcing bar spacing

Option Description
Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover
thickness of the reinforcing bar group.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar C tab

Use the Bar C tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 319 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of

the reinforcing bar group.

Extra I bars

Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box represents the extra I
bars.

Define whether to create the extra I bars. Select the check

boxes next to the purple points.

Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar D tab

Use the Bar D tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 320 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of

the reinforcing bar group.

Extra I bars
Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar D. You can create up to four extra I bars.

Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box represents the extra I
bars.

Define whether to create the extra I bars. Select the

check boxes next to the purple points.

Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.

Concrete Detailing 321 Concrete stairs

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar E tab
Use the Bar E tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Create options

Option Description
No Bar is not created.

Stirrup Bar is created as stirrup.

Pin Bar is created as pin.

Concrete Detailing 322 Concrete stairs

 Option Description

Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of

the reinforcing bar group.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar F tab

Use the Bar F tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 323 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover

thickness of the reinforcing bar group.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar G tab

Use the Bar G tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 324 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness

of the reinforcing bar group.

Extra I bars
Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar G. You can create up to four extra I bars.

Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box represents the
extra I bars.

Define whether to create extra I bars. Select the

check boxes next to the purple points.

Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar H tab

Use the Bar H tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 325 Concrete stairs

Create option

Option Description
• Do not create bar H
• Create bar H
• Create only bottom bar H reinforcing bar group

Bar H geometry option

Option Description
Two bent reinforcing bar groups. Define geometry
and concrete cover thickness.

Top reinforcing bar group is straight, bottom

reinforcing bar group is bent on both sides. Define
geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Two bent reinforcing bar groups. Define geometry

and concrete cover thickness.

Option Description
Spacing, number of reinforcing bars and concrete
cover thickness of the reinforcing bar group.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar I tab

Use the Bar I tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 326 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Positioning, spacing and concrete cover thickness.

Concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing bar groups.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar J tab

Use the Bar J tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool. You can create several bar J reinforcing bar groups. Each group has
its own color representation on the Bar J tab.

Color group options

Option Description
Use the color group option to define which combination
of bar J reinforcing bar groups (blue, green, brown) is
created.

Concrete Detailing 327 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Positioning and concrete cover thickness for reinforcing
bar groups based on the color representation.

Concrete cover thickness for all reinforcing bar groups.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar K tab

Use the Bar K tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.

Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness

of the reinforcing bar group.

Extra I bars
Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar K. You can create up to three extra I bars.

Concrete Detailing 328 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box represents
the extra I bars.
Define whether to create extra I bars by
selecting the check boxes next to the purple
points.

Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bar L tab

Use the Bar L tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing
and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool.

Option Description
Define whether an L shaped reinforcing bar group is created
at the stair footing.

Define offsets for the reinforcing bar groups in the two top
steps.

Define geometry for reinforcing bar groups in all steps,

except for the two top steps.

Concrete Detailing 329 Concrete stairs

 Option Description
Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover thickness of
the reinforcing bar group.

Bar L geometry options

Option Description
L shape reinforcing bar groups.

L shape reinforcing bar groups with hooks.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh picture tab

Use the Mesh picture tab with the Mesh attributes tab to define bottom landing meshes,
stair meshes and top landing meshes in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Side view

Description
1 Bottom landing mesh (top). Define
offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.
2 Bottom landing mesh (bottom). Define
offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.
3 Stair mesh (top). Define offsets and
cover thickness of the mesh.
4 Stair mesh (bottom). Define offsets and
cover thickness of the mesh.
5 Top landing mesh (top). Define offsets
and cover thickness of the mesh.
6 Top landing mesh (bottom). Define
offsets and cover thickness of the mesh.

Concrete Detailing 330 Concrete stairs

Top view

Description
1 Cover thickness of bottom landing mesh (top).
2 Cover thickness of bottom landing mesh
(bottom).
3 Cover thickness of stair mesh (top).
4 Cover thickness of stair mesh (bottom).
5 Cover thickness of top landing mesh (top).
6 Cover thickness of top landing mesh (bottom).

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh attributes tab

Use the Mesh attributes tab with the Mesh picture tab to define the properties, positioning
and creation type of bottom landing meshes, stair meshes and top landing meshes in the
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Cross bar location

Description
Cross bar above.

Cross bar below.

Concrete Detailing 331 Concrete stairs

Creation type

Description
Create mesh as reinforcement mesh.

Create mesh as two independent reinforcing groups.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Mesh bars tab

Use the Mesh bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar
spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the mesh bars in the top and bottom landing in the
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool. You can create up to three reinforcing bar
groups.

Description
1 Cover thicknesses of all mesh bar groups in the
stair bottom landing.
Use the color representation in the dialog box.
2 Vertical cover thicknesses of all mesh bar
groups in the stair bottom landing.
Use the color representation in the dialog box.
3 Cover thicknesses of all mesh bar groups in the
stair top landing.
Use the color representation in the dialog box.
4 Vertical cover thicknesses of all mesh bar
groups in the stair top landing.
Use the color representation in the dialog box.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Bottom anchor bars tab

Use the Bottom anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the bottom anchor bars in the
Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool. You can create up to three reinforcing bar
groups.

Creation type

Option Description
No No reinforcing bar group created.
Type1 L shape anchor reinforcing bar group.

Concrete Detailing 332 Concrete stairs

 Option Description

Type2 Simple straight anchor reinforcing bar group.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Top anchor bars tab

Use the Top anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the top anchor bars in the Reinforced
Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups.

Creation type

Option Description
No No reinforcing bar group created.
Type1 L shape anchor reinforcing bar group.

Type2 Simple straight anchor reinforcing bar group.

Concrete Detailing 333 Concrete stairs

 Option Description

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Z anchor bars tab

Use the Z anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar
spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the Z anchor bars in the Reinforced Concrete
Stair (95) modeling tool. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups.

Description
1 Cover thicknesses of all Z
anchor bar groups in the stair
bottom landing.
Use the color representation in
the dialog box.
2 Vertical cover thicknesses of all
Z anchor bar groups in the stair
main part.
Use the color representation in
the dialog box.
3 Cover thicknesses of all Z
anchor bar groups in the stair
top landing.
Use the color representation in
the dialog box.
Bot Length of the Z anchor bars that
L extend from the stair bottom
landing.
Top Length of the Z anchor bars that
L extend from the stair top
landing.

Concrete Detailing 334 Concrete stairs

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Landing end bars tab
Use the Landing end bars tab to reinforce the stair landings and to define the geometry,
concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and bar properties of the landing end bars
in the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Bottom end
Reinforcement of bottom landing.

Description
1 Landing end bars. U-shape geometry follows the
shape of the landing based on the defined cover
thicknesses.
Color representation in the picture: blue, green.
2 Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the
check boxes next to the purple points.
3 Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the
check boxes next to the red points.

Top end
Reinforcement of top landing.

Description
1 Landing end bars. U-shape geometry follows the
shape of the landing based on defined cover
thicknesses.
Color representation in the picture: blue, green.
2 Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the
check boxes next to purple points.
3 Define whether to create extra cross bars. Select the
check boxes next to red points.

Side cover thickness

Option Description
Side cover thickness of all reinforcing bar groups defined on
the Landing end bars tab.

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95): Configuration

Use the Configuration tab to define the default cover thicknesses and bending radiuses of all
reinforcing bars created by the Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) modeling tool.

Concrete Detailing 335 Concrete stairs

 Cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups A - C
Define the default cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups A - C.

Option Description
Value Default cover thickness defined by a value.
Rebar diameter Default cover thickness multiplied by reinforcing bar
diameter.

General cover thickness bars D - L

Define the default cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups D - L and all reinforcing bars
except the reinforcing bar groups A - C and meshes.

Option Description
Value Default cover thickness defined by a value.
Rebar diameter Default cover thickness multiplied by reinforcing bar
diameter.

Bending radius
Define the default bending radius of all reinforcing bars.

Option Description
Rebar_database.inp Default bending radius defined by
rebar_database.inp file.
Relative to diameter Default bending radius according to the reinforcing bar
diameter.
Bending radius Default bending radius defined by value.

Mesh cover thickness

Define the default cover thickness for the meshes created by the Reinforced Concrete Stair
(95) modeling tool.

1.8 Foundations
This section introduces components that can be used in concrete foundations.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Precast foundation block (1028) on page 336
• Concrete foundation (1030) on page 342

Concrete Detailing 336 Foundations

Precast foundation block (1028)
Precast foundation block (1028) creates a concrete foundation block. The block can be
divided in three sections. All three sections can be dimensioned separately.

Parts created
• Foundation block
• Embed
• Regulator

Use for

Situation Description
Precast foundation block with three sections.

Concrete Detailing 337 Foundations

 Situation Description
Precast foundation block with one section.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (concrete column).
2. Pick a position.
The detail is created automatically.

See also
Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab on page 338
Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab on page 340
Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab on page 341

Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to dimension the foundation block in Precast foundation block (1028).

Concrete Detailing 338 Foundations

The foundation block can be dimensioned in both the front view and in the side view.

Description
1 Width of the top chord in section 1 (in front view).
2 Width of the inclined column cut-out.
3 Height of the column cut-out.
4 Offset of the plate that is under the block.
The offset is relative to the foundation block.
5 Thickness of the plate under the block.
6 Width of the bottom chord in section 1 (in front view).
Width of section 2 and section 3 (in front view).
7 Distance between the foundation block and the sides of the column.
8 Select how the sections in the foundation block are connected.
9 Select the reference point of the Component insertion
foundation block. point is at the bottom
side of the foundation
block.
Note that the red part
(additional plate

Concrete Detailing 339 Foundations

 Description
Additionally, you can set the vertical under the block) is not
offset: taken into account.

Component insertion
point is at the bottom
side of the cut-out of
the column.

Component insertion
point is at the bottom
side of the column.

Component insertion
point is at the top of
the foundation block.

10 Width of the top chord in section 1 (in side view).

11 Distance from the bottom of the column to the foundation block.
12 Width of the bottom chord in section 1 (in side view).
Width of section 2 and section 3 (in side view).

Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab

Use the Parts to define the profiles for the foundation block, embed and regulator, and the
embed dimensions in Precast foundation block (1028).

Concrete Detailing 340 Foundations

 Optio Description
n
1 Foundation block profiles, regulator and embed properties.
If you do not select any material, Precast foundation block (1028) uses the same
material as the column.
2 Select whether the regulator and the embed is created, and how they are connected
to the foundation block.
3 Dimensions of the three sections of the foundation block.
Additionally, you can define the column cut-out in the upper section.
For sections 2 and 3 you can define the height of the inclined plane.
4 Dimensions of the embed.

Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab

Use the Grooves tab to define the grooves in Precast foundation block (1028).

Example:

Concrete Detailing 341 Foundations

 Description
1 Height of the groove.
2 Distance between the grooves.
3 First distance related to the bottom of the column.
4 Depth for the grooves.
5 Number for the grooves.

Concrete foundation (1030)

Concrete foundation (1030) creates a concrete foundation plate at the bottom of a
selected concrete column.

Objects created
• Concrete foundation plate
• Injection tubes and injection hoses in concrete column

Concrete Detailing 342 Foundations

• Up to 4 concrete piles under the foundation plate (optional)
• Stirrups for the reinforcing bars

Use for

Situation Description
Concrete foundation plate with chamfers,
piles, injection tubes with curved injection
hoses, reinforcing bars and stirrups.

Concrete foundation plate with more than 4

edges, recesses in the foundation plate, and
multiple reinforcing bars.

Concrete Detailing 343 Foundations

 Situation Description
Concrete foundation plate with multiple
reinforcing bars.

Selection order
1. Select a concrete column.
2. Pick a point.
The concrete foundation plate is created automatically when the point is picked.

Concrete Detailing 344 Foundations

Part identification key

Part
1 Concrete column
2 Point
The point defines the new bottom level of the column.

See also
Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab on page 345
Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab on page 349
Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab on page 351
Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab on page 353
Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab on page 354
Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab on page 357
Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab on page 358

Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the dimensions of the reinforcing bars and injection tubes in
Concrete foundation (1030).

Concrete Detailing 345 Foundations

Dimensions

Description Default
1 Length of the injection tube extension from the 180 mm
top of reinforcing bar.
2 Reinforcing bar height in the column. 400 mm
3 Reinforcing bar top and bottom cover thickness. 0,5 * foundation
plate thickness
4 The bottom cover thickness is used only if you do
not define the top cover thickness.
5 Pile thickness. 300 mm
The pile thickness value on the Parts tab
overrides this value.
6 Distance from the bottom of the foundation 5000 mm
plate to the bottom of the pile.
7 Pile depth in the foundation plate. 50 mm
8 Foundation plate thickness. 800 mm

Concrete Detailing 346 Foundations

 Description Default
9 Distance between the column and the 0 mm
foundation plate.
10 Vertical offset from the picked point. 0 mm

11 Reinforcing bar height. 800 mm 400 mm + 50% of

height of concrete footing
12 Injection tube elevation 1. 500 mm
13 Injection tube elevations 2 and 3.
Vertical offset for the injection tubes if the tubes
are pointing to the same direction.
Define the level to use on the Inj. Tube and
rebar tab.

Injection tube
Select the shape and dimensions of the injection tubes.

Option Description
Injection tube in one piece, 90 degree angle.

Concrete Detailing 347 Foundations

Option Description
Injection tube in one piece.
Use value a to define the slope of the tube.

Injection tube and a 90 degree injection hose.

Injection tube and a sloped injection hose.

Use value a to define the slope of the hose.

Straight injection tube. No injection tube opening is created.

Concrete Detailing 348 Foundations

 Description Default
1 Define the height of a sloped injection tube or 30 mm
hose angle.
2 Define the height of a curved injection hose. 0 mm

Reinforcing bar hook length

Define the reinforcing bar hook length. You can define also the end angle of the reinforcing
bar.
The default value is 10 * reinforcing bar diameter.

Concrete Detailing 349 Foundations

Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the profile properties of the foundation plate, foundation piles,
stirrups and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030).

Concrete massive, Piles

Define the profile properties of the concrete foundation plate and the foundation piles.
If you leave the pile thickness value empty on the Parts tab, the pile thickness value defined
on the Picture tab is used instead together with the Pile profile type prefix (e.g. D).

Option Description
t, b, h Part thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part position
number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Part class number.
Comment Add a comment for the part.

Reinforcing bars

Option Description
Type of reinforcing bars Select the profile type for the reinforcing bars.
• Default: the same as Reinforcing bar
• Poly-profile: profile catalog
• Reinforcing bar: reinforcing bar catalog
Reinforcement bars Size of the reinforcing bars.
Radius Radius of the reinforcing bar hook.
Reinf. bars belong to Define to which part the reinforcing bars belong.
• Default: the same as Columns
• Concrete massive: reinforcing bars belong to the
concrete foundation plate.
• Column: reinforcing bars belong to the column.

Injection tubes and curve

Option Description
Injection tubes Size of the injection tubes.
Curve Size of the injection hoses.

Concrete Detailing 350 Foundations

 Option Description
Article number Article number for the injection hose and the
injection tube.
The entered values are saved to the user-
defined attribute of the part.
Define how the injection hoses are
connected to the injection tubes.
• Default: injection hoses are loose parts.
• Part-add gain: injection hoses are added
to the injection tubes.
• Weld gain: injection hoses are welded to
the injection tubes.
• Cast unit column: injection hoses are
added to the column.
• Weld to column: injection hoses are
welded to the column.

Option Description
Pile profile type prefix (e.g. D) Default parametric profile prefix for the piles.
This value works only if you have set the pile
thickness on the Picture tab.
You can override this value by setting the
pile thickness on the Parts tab.
Reinf. bar profile type prefix (e.g.D) Default parametric profile prefix for the
reinforcing bar profiles.

Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab

Use the Massive tab to control the shape and the dimensions of the concrete foundation
plate and the recesses in Concrete foundation (1030).

Concrete foundation plate type

Option Description
Type of massive Select the plate type for the rectangular foundation
plate.
Massive direction Select the direction of the foundation plate.

Concrete Detailing 351 Foundations

Concrete foundation plate dimensions

Description
1 Offset from the concrete column in the x direction.
2 Offset from the concrete column in the y direction.
3 Select the shape of the foundation plate.
4 Width of the foundation plate.
5 Length of the straight part of the foundation plate.
6
7 Offset from the foundation plate center line.
8 Width of the straight part of the foundation plate.
9 Length of the foundation plate.

Concrete Detailing 352 Foundations

Recess dimensions

Description
1 Select the type of the recess.
2 Width of the recesses.
3 Depth of the recesses.
4 Distance between the bottom of the reinforcing bar and the bottom
of the recess.
5 Distance between the center line of the reinforcing bar and the left
side of the recess.
6
Distance between the center line of the reinforcing bar and the right
side of the recess.

Option Description
Chamfer type for rectangular Chamfer type for the rectangular foundation plate.
massive
Chamfer X Chamfer size in the x direction.
Chamfer Y Chamfer size in the y direction.

Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab

Use the Piles tab to control the position of the foundation piles in Concrete foundation
(1030).

Concrete Detailing 353 Foundations

Pile positions

Description
1 Select the position and the offset of the piles.
2 Distance between the first pile and the column in the x direction.
4 Distance between the second pile and the column in the x direction.
6 Distance between the third pile and the column in the x direction.

8 Distance between the fourth pile and the column in the x direction.

3 Distance between the first pile and the column in y direction.

5 Distance between the second pile and the column in y direction.
7 Distance between the third pile and the column in y direction.

9 Distance between the fourth pile and the column in y direction.

10 Pile offset from the concrete column in the x direction.

11 Pile offset from the concrete column in the y direction.

Option Description
Piles direction Define the direction of the piles.
Join piles to massive Define how the piles are connected to the foundation
plate.

Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab

Use the Inj. tube and rebar tab to control the creation, number and position of the
reinforcing bars and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030).

Option Description
Create Select which parts are created.
Injection tubes bend radius Radius of the injection tubes.

Concrete Detailing 354 Foundations

Injection tube properties

Description
1 Select the direction of the bent bars.
2 Select the direction of the injection hoses.
3 Number of injection tubes.
4 Center-to-center distance between the injection tubes.
5 Define the level of the curved injection parts.
This is useful if the curved parts are pointing to the same direction.
You can define the levels on the Picture tab.

Concrete Detailing 355 Foundations

 Description

Example:

6 Define the distance from the center of the injection tube to the outer
contour of the concrete foundation.

Concrete Detailing 356 Foundations

Example

Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab

Use the Column tab to control the dimensions of the column cut-out in Concrete
foundation (1030).

Concrete Detailing 357 Foundations

Column dimensions

Description
1 Size of the column cut-out.
2 Height of the column cut-out.

Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab

Use the Stirrups tab to control the stirrup properties in Concrete foundation (1030).

Stirrup properties

Option Description
Select whether the stirrups are created.
Define the length of the laps.

Grade Grade of the stirrups.

Size Size of the stirrups.
End conditions left Hook for the start point of the stirrups.
End conditions right Hook for the end point of the stirrups.
Bend lengths left Hook length for the start point of the stirrup.
Bend lengths right Hook length for the end point of the stirrup.
Creation method Creation method of the stirrups.
Number of bars: Enter the number of the stirrups.

Concrete Detailing 358 Foundations

Option Description

By spacing: Enter a spacing value.

Define the comment, name, class, serie and start number for the
stirrups.

Concrete Detailing 359 Foundations

 Description
1 Select the start point of stirrups, either from the bottom of the column to the
first stirrup or from the top of the reinforcing bar to first stirrup.
2 Define the distance from the bottom of the reinforcing bar to the last stirrup.

Example

Concrete Detailing 360 Foundations

2 Reinforcement

This section introduces components that can be used in reinforcement.

See also
Reinforcement for foundations on page 361
Beam, column, and slab reinforcement on page 372
Lifting on page 547

2.1 Reinforcement for foundations

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create
reinforcement for foundations:

Component Description
Strip footing (75) on page 361 Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing.
Pile cap reinforcement (76) on Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap.
page 363
Pad footing (77) on page 368 Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing.
Starter bars on page 370 Creates starter bars in a footing and a pedestal
for a column.
Creates starter bars in a footing for a column.

Strip footing (75)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing.

Bars created
• Longitudinal bars for the top and bottom surfaces and sides of the footing
• Stirrups

Reinforcement 361 Reinforcement for foundations

Use for

Situation More information

Straight strip footings that have rectangular cross
sections
Main bars entirely
inside the footing, no
side bars, stirrup laps
at stirrup corners.

Main bars protruding

from the footing, two
bars on both sides,
stirrup laps in the
middle of the top
surface.

Do not use for

Footings that have:
• Irregular cross sections
• Skew or cut corners

Before you start

• Create the concrete strip footing.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Strip footing (75) dialog box to define the properties of the
objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Concrete cover thickness,
location of side bars and first
stirrups
Main bars Grade, size, number, spacing, Strip footing
and bond lengths of the top, reinforcement
bottom, left, and right bars properties on page 363
Stirrups Grade, size, spacing, and bend
type of stirrups
Attributes Numbering properties, name,
and class of the top, bottom,
left, and right bars, and
stirrups

Reinforcement 362 Reinforcement for foundations

Picking order
1. Concrete strip footing.

Strip footing reinforcement properties

Bond length of main bars
Bond lengths define how far main bars extend into adjacent structures at the ends of strip
footings. Use the Bond length 1 fields on the Main bars tab for the first end of the footing
(with the yellow handle), and the Bond length 2 fields for the second end of the footing
(with the magenta handle).
You can define bond lengths separately for:
• Top bars
• Bottom bars
• Bars on the left side of the footing
• Bars on the right side of the footing

Bend type for stirrups

To define the location of the stirrup laps in the strip footing, select an option from the Bend
type list box on the Stirrups tab. The options are:

Option Examples
At mid

At corner

Reinforcement 363 Reinforcement for foundations

Pile cap reinforcement (76)
Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap.

Bars created
• Bars in two directions for the top and bottom surfaces of the pile cap
• Lacer bars

Use for

Situation More information

Bottom bars concentrated over
the piles, top bars under the
column. Two lacer bars.

Bars evenly distributed on the

bottom and top surfaces. No lacer
bars.

Rectangular footings with or without Pad footing and pile cap shapes
cut corners, footings that are skewed on page 365
on one or both sides
Bars on the top, bottom, or both
surfaces of the footing
Straight or bent bar ends

Before you start

• Create the concrete pile cap.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Pilecap reinforcement (76) dialog box to define the properties
of the objects that this component creates:

Reinforcement 364 Reinforcement for foundations

 Tab Contents See also
Picture Concrete cover thickness,
primary bar direction
Primary top Grade, size, hooks, bend Bar distribution on
bars lengths, distribution (by page 366
Secondary top number or spacing), and
bars arrangement/location of the
top and bottom bars in two
Primary directions
bottom bars
Secondary
bottom bars
Lacer bars Option to create lacer bars, Lacer bars for pad
grade, size, number, spacing, footings and pile caps
location, type, orientation, and on page 367
laps of lacer bars
Attributes Numbering properties, name,
and class of the top, bottom,
and lacer bars

Picking order
1. Concrete pile cap
2. Piles and/or columns
3. Click the middle mouse button to finish.

Pad footing and pile cap shapes

Use the Pile cap reinforcement (76) and Pad footing (77) tools to create reinforcement for
the following shapes of foundations:

Shape Description
Rectangular

Skewed on two sides

Reinforcement 365 Reinforcement for foundations

 Shape Description
Skewed on one side

Rectangular with cut corners

Bar distribution
Pad footings
In pad footings, you can arrange the main reinforcing bars into:
• One zone of bars that have the same bar properties
• Three zones of bars that have different bar properties
You set the options separately for primary and secondary bars. Select an option from the
Arrangement list box on the relevant tab in the Pad footing (77) dialog box.

Pile caps
Define the pile cap reinforcement using the following properties in the Pile cap
reinforcement (76) dialog box:

Field Description
To suit pile/column Select Yes to concentrate main bars over
piles and under columns.
% of pile/column width The area where the bars are
concentrated, as a percentage of the
width of the pile or column.
For example, if the pile diameter or width
is 500 mm, enter 120 in the % of pile
width field to concentrate bars in a
600 mm-wide area over the pile.

Bar portioning (%) The proportion of bars concentrated over

a pile or under a column.
Bar portioning (number of The number of bars concentrated over a
bars) pile or under a column.

You can define these properties separately for:

• Primary top bars

Reinforcement 366 Reinforcement for foundations

• Secondary top bars
• Primary bottom bars
• Secondary bottom bars

Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps

Lacer bars are reinforcing bars that loop around the sides of a concrete footing.
You can create up to six different groups of lacer bars in a footing. Each group can contain
different values for:
• Grade
• Bar size
• Number of bars
• Spacing
• Shape
• Dimensions
To create lacer bars for a footing:
1. Open the footing reinforcement properties dialog box and click the Lacer bars tab.
2. In the Lacer bar option list box, select Yes to create lacer bars.
3. Enter properties for each lacer bar group:

Property Description
Quantity, spacing, and location of lacer bar
groups.
Tekla Structures only uses information from
some of the fields, in this order of priority:
1. Number of bars and Spacing
2. Number of bars, Start, and End
3. Spacing, Start, and End

Type The number and location of laps. The

options are:

Orientation The options are Default, Front, and Back.

Reinforcement 367 Reinforcement for foundations

 Property Description
p1...p4 The exact locations and lengths of lacer bar
laps. Locations are measured from the
L1...L4
corner of the bar to the midpoints of laps.

The location of the topmost lacer bar,

measured from the end of main bars.
Entering a value here overrides the location
defined in the End field.

Pad footing (77)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing.

Bars created
• Bars in two directions for the bottom surface of the pad footing
• Lacer bars

Use for

Situation More information

Rectangular footing, 90-degree
hooks at the primary bar ends,
180-degree hooks at the
secondary bar ends, no lacer bars.

Reinforcement 368 Reinforcement for foundations

 Situation More information
Rectangular footing, three zones
of primary bars with different
spacing, straight bar ends, three
lacer bars.

Footing skewed on two sides, two

groups of lacer bars with
different spacing.

Rectangular footings with or without Pad footing and pile cap shapes
cut corners, footings that are skewed on page 365
on one or both sides

Before you start

• Create the concrete pad footing.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Pad footing (77) dialog box to define the properties of the
objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Concrete cover thickness
Primary bar Arrangement, grade, size, Bar distribution on
Secondary bar hooks, bend lengths, and page 366
distribution (by number or
spacing) of the primary and
secondary bars, primary bar
direction
Lacer bar Grade, size, number, spacing, Lacer bars for pad
location, type, orientation, and footings and pile caps
laps of lacer bars on page 367
Attributes Numbering properties, name,
and class of the primary,
secondary, and lacer bars

Reinforcement 369 Reinforcement for foundations

Picking order
1. Concrete pad footing

Starter bars
Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87) create starter bars in a
footing for a column. Starter bars may go through a pedestal or straight to the column.
Starter bars can be in a rectangular or circular form.

Bars created
• Starter bars (straight or L-shaped)
• Stirrups (optional)

Use for

Situation More information

Starter bars for footing (87)
places starter bars in a footing in
rectangular or circular form.
Starter bars can be straight or L-
shaped, and can have stirrups.

Starter bars for pillar (86)

creates straight or L-shaped
starter bars that go through a
rectangular or circular pedestal.
Starter bars can have stirrups.

Before you start

• Create the footing.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87)
dialog boxes to define the component properties:

Reinforcement 370 Reinforcement for foundations

 Tab Contents See also
Picture 86: Bar dimensions and Starter bar stirrups on
locations, number and spacing page 371
of bars, stirrup type, concrete
cover thickness
87: Bar dimensions and
locations, number and spacing
of bars, concrete cover
thickness
Location 87 only: Location of bars, Starter bar location on
stirrup type page 371
Starter bar stirrups on
page 371
Parameters Grade, size, name, class, and
numbering properties of bars

Picking order
1. Footing
2. Pedestal (only for Starter bars for pillar (86))

Starter bar stirrups

Use these options to define stirrup laps in footings:

Option Description
Laps on the side of the stirrups
45-degree hooks at bar ends

Laps at stirrup corners

135-degree hooks at bar ends

Laps at stirrup corners

90-degree hooks at bar ends

If the starter bars are in a circular

form, you must define the angle of
stirrup overlap.

Reinforcement 371 Reinforcement for foundations

 Starter bar location
When you use Starter bars for footing (87), you must define the location of starter bars.
Enter the distance from the center of the bar group to the center of the footing, in two
directions:

2.2 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to automatically create
reinforcement for beams, columns, and slabs:
• Mesh Bars on page 373
• Mesh Bars by Area on page 378
• Slab bars (18) on page 401
• Slab Reinforcement Tool on page 403
• Beam reinforcement (63) on page 407
• Double tee reinforcement (64) on page 411
• Beam end reinforcement (79) on page 413
• Corbel reinforcement (81) on page 417
• Round column reinforcement (82) on page 422
• Rectangular column reinforcement (83) on page 425
• Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) on page 436
• Hole creation and reinforcement (85) on page 438
• Braced girder (88) on page 442
• Braced girder (89) on page 461
• Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) on page 480
• Wall Panel Reinforcement on page 485
• Multiple Wire Size Mesh on page 492
• Embedded anchors (8) on page 495
• Embed (1008) on page 536
• Continuous Beam Reinforcement on page 546

Reinforcement 372 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Mesh Bars
Mesh Bars creates reinforcement for concrete slabs or walls.

Objects created
• Primary bars
• Crossing bars

Use for

Situation Description
Reinforcement for the bottom or the top
surface of the concrete element, or for both.

Selection order
1. Select a concrete slab.
The reinforcement is created automatically.

See also
Mesh Bars: Picture tab on page 374
Mesh Bars: Detailing tab on page 375
Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab on page 376
Mesh Bars: Splicing tab on page 377
Mesh Bars: Attributes tab on page 378

Reinforcement 373 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Mesh Bars: Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to define how the top and bottom bars are created in Mesh Bars.

Option Description
Create bars Top bars with primary bars above
secondary bars

Top bars with secondary bars above

primary bars

No bars

The same options are available for the bottom bars as well.
The value defined in the box is the cover thickness for the top/bottom
layer.
Same as Select whether the top bars are created using the same properties as the
bottom bottom bars.
If you select No, enter the top bar properties.
Bar type Select whether the bars are created as a bar group or as a mesh.
Size Select the diameter of a bar.
You can set the size separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and
for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the bars.
You can set the grade separately for the top primary and secondary bars,
and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Spacing type Select whether the spacing is based on the number of bars or the spacing
value.
• By spacings: enter the distance between the bars in the Spacing box.
• Number of bars: enter the number of bars in the Number of bars box.
Spacing Distance between the bars.
Tekla Structures calculates the number of bars.
You can set the spacing separately for the top primary and secondary bars,
and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Number of Number of bars.
bars

Reinforcement 374 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Tekla Structures calculates the distance between bars.
You can set the number of bars separately for the top primary and
secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Primary bars The direction of the primary bars. Use to change bar direction.
direction
If the Auto option is selected, the primary bars are created along the two
longest parallel sides of a slab. If there are no parallel sides, then the bars
are created along the slab x direction instead.
Up direction Select which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of the slab.
If the Auto option is selected, then the bars are created on the side with
the greatest area.

Mesh Bars: Detailing tab

Use the Detailing tab to control how the bars are distributed in Mesh Bars.

Option Description
Bar edge Define the edge distance of the bars.
distances
Adjustment Select how the bars are distributed.
The same options are available for both the primary and the secondary
bars.
Equal distribution by target
spacing value.

By exact spacing value with

flexible first space without first bar.

By exact spacing value with

flexible last space without last bar.

By exact spacing value with

flexible first and last space without
first and last bars.

Reinforcement 375 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
By exact spacing value with
flexible first space.

By exact spacing value with

flexible last space.

By exact spacing value with

flexible first and last space.

Bar grouping Select whether tapered bars are grouped or not.

If you group the tapered bars, select how the bars along tapered the
edge are handled.
Tapered bars are handled normally.

Creates as many bars as possible

with same length in the tapered
edge.

Bar behavior at Select how bars next to openings are handled.

cuts
• Cut bars: Select whether the bars are cut and which cuts are
ignored.
• Ignore openings smaller than: The minimum value by which the
bar is shortened. Lower values are ignored.
• Cover thickness in holes: Distance between the bar end/start point
to the edge of the opening.
Minimum length Bars that are shorter than this value are not created.
of bar to be
created

Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab

Use the Bar end conditions tab to control the cover thickness and bar hooks in Mesh Bars.

Reinforcement 376 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Cover • Different each side: Each end of a bar group can have different
thickness on distances from part edges.
sides
• Same all sides: All ends of the bar groups have the same distance
from part edge.
End conditions Creates a 90° hook at a given end
of bar

Creates a 135° hook at a given end

of bar.

Creates a 180° hook at a given end

of bar.

Creates a straight bar without a

hook at the given end of a bar.

Creates a hook with a free angle at

the given end of a bar.

Creates a double bent hook at the

given end of a bar.

Bending radius Bending radius at bar ends

Bending Bending length at bar ends
length

Mesh Bars: Splicing tab

Use the Splicing tab to control the splicing of the reinforcing bars in Mesh Bars.

Option Description
Splice bars Select whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or not.
Maximum length of bar Maximum reinforcing bar length after which the bars are
spliced.
Splicing in same cross Select how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in the same
section location.
• 1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same cross
section.
• 1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in the same
cross section.

Reinforcement 377 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
• 1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the same
cross section.
• 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in the same
cross section.
Splicing symmetry Select the symmetry that is applied when the reinforcing
bars are spliced.
• Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the reinforcing
bar is not symmetrical and the uneven length is only at
one side.
• Symmetrical with different lengths at sides: The splice
pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with
uneven lengths at the sides.
• Symmetrical with different length at center: The
splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with
uneven length in the center.
Splicing offset Offset of the splice center point from the point where the
reinforcing bars originally met.
Minimum splitting distance Minimum longitudinal distance between two splices in
consecutive bars.
Splicing type Select the type of the splice.
Lapping length Length of the lapping connection.

Mesh Bars: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the bar group or mesh properties in the Mesh Bars
modeling tool.

Option Description
Name Name of the bar group or mesh.
Prefix Prefix for the part position number of the bar group or mesh.
Start number Start number for the part position number of the bar group or
mesh.
Class Class of the bar group or mesh.
If you create a mesh, only the class of primary bars is taken into
account.

Mesh Bars by Area

Mesh Bars by Area creates reinforcement for concrete slabs or walls.

Reinforcement 378 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Objects created
• Primary bars
• Crossing bars

Use for

Situation Description
Reinforcement for the bottom or top surface
of the concrete element, or for both.

Selection order
1. Select a concrete slab.
2. Select a group of points to define a working polygon.
The reinforcement is created automatically.

See also
Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab on page 379
Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab on page 382
Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab on page 384
Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab on page 384
Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab on page 385

Reinforcement 379 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to define how the top and bottom bars are created in Mesh Bars by
Area.

Option Description
Create bars Top bars with primary bars above
secondary bars

Top bars with secondary bars above

primary bars

No bars

The same options are available for the bottom bars as well.
The value defined in the box is the cover thickness for the top/bottom
layer.
Mesh area Select the outline that the mesh follows.
perimeter
The meshes in the examples are created by picking the same points but
with different mesh area perimeters.
Part, for example:

Part

Reinforcement 380 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Polygon, for example:

Polygon

Part + polygon, for example:

Polygon + part

Same as Select whether the top bars are created using the same properties as the
bottom bottom bars.
If you select No, enter the top bar properties.
Bar type Select whether the bars are created as a bar group or as a mesh.
Size Select the diameter of a bar.
You can set the size separately for the top primary and secondary bars, and
for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the bars.
You can set the grade separately for the top primary and secondary bars,
and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Spacing type Select whether the spacing is based on the number of bars or the spacing
value.
• By spacings: enter the distance between the bars in the Spacing box.
• Number of bars: enter the number of bars in the Number of bars box.
Spacing Distance between the bars.

Reinforcement 381 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Tekla Structures calculates the number of bars.
You can set the spacing separately for the top primary and secondary bars,
and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Number of Number of bars.
bars
Tekla Structures calculates the distance between bars.
You can set the number of bars separately for the top primary and
secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary bars.
Primary bars The direction of the primary bars. Use to change bar direction.
direction
If the Auto option is selected, the primary bars are created along the two
longest parallel sides of a slab. If there are no parallel sides, then the bars
are created along the slab x direction instead.
Up direction Select which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of the slab.
If the Auto option is selected, then the bars are created on the side with
the greatest area.

Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab

Use the Detailing tab to control how the bars are distributed in Mesh Bars by Area.

Option Description
Bar edge Define the edge distance of the bars.
distances
Adjustment Select how the bars are distributed.
The same options are available for both the primary and the secondary
bars.
Equal distribution by target
spacing value.

By exact spacing value with

flexible first space without first bar.

By exact spacing value with

flexible last space without last bar.

Reinforcement 382 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
By exact spacing value with
flexible first and last space without
first and last bars.

By exact spacing value with

flexible first space.

By exact spacing value with

flexible last space.

By exact spacing value with

flexible first and last space.

Bar grouping Select whether tapered bars are grouped or not.

If you group the tapered bars, select how the bars along tapered the edge
are handled.
Tapered bars are handled normally.

Creates as many bars as possible

with same length in the tapered
edge.

Bar behavior at Select how bars next to openings are handled.

cuts
• Cut bars: Select whether the bars are cut and which cuts are
ignored.
• Ignore openings smaller than: The minimum value by which the bar
is shortened. Lower values are ignored.
• Cover thickness in holes: Distance between the bar end/start point
to the edge of the opening.
Minimum Bars that are shorter than this value are not created.
length of bar to
be created

Reinforcement 383 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab
Use the Bar end conditions tab to control the cover thickness and bar hooks in Mesh Bars
by Area.

Option Description
Cover • Different each side: Each end of a bar group can have different
thickness on distances from part edges.
sides
• Same all sides: All ends of the bar groups have the same distance
from part edge.
End conditions Creates a 90° hook at a given end
of bar

Creates a 135° hook at a given end

of bar.

Creates a 180° hook at a given end

of bar.

Creates a straight bar without a

hook at the given end of a bar.

Creates a hook with a free angle at

the given end of a bar.

Creates a double bent hook at the

given end of a bar.

Bending radius Bending radius at bar ends

Bending Bending length at bar ends
length

Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab

Use the Splicing tab to control the splicing of the reinforcing bars in Mesh Bars by Area.

Option Description
Splice bars Select whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or not.
Maximum length of bar Maximum reinforcing bar length after which the bars are
spliced.

Reinforcement 384 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Splicing in same cross Select how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in the same
section location.
• 1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same cross
section.
• 1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in the same
cross section.
• 1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the same
cross section.
• 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in the same
cross section.
Splicing symmetry Select the symmetry that is applied when the reinforcing
bars are spliced.
• Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the reinforcing
bar is not symmetrical and the uneven length is only at
one side.
• Symmetrical with different lengths at sides: The splice
pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with
uneven lengths at the sides.
• Symmetrical with different length at center: The
splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical with
uneven length in the center.
Splicing offset Offset of the splice center point from the point where the
reinforcing bars originally met.
Minimum splitting distance Minimum longitudinal distance between two splices in
consecutive bars.
Splicing type Select the type of the splice.
Lapping length Length of the lapping connection.

Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the bar group or mesh properties in the Mesh Bars by Area
modeling tool.

Option Description
Name Name of the bar group or mesh.
Prefix Prefix for the part position number of the bar group or mesh.
Start number Start number for the part position number of the bar group or
mesh.

Reinforcement 385 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Class Class of the bar group or mesh.
If you create a mesh, only the class of primary bars is taken into
account.

Rebar coupler
Rebar coupler creates couplers to split reinforcing bars and bar groups, or to bars and bar
groups whose ends are in contact and parallel.

Rebar coupler is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor
Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components belong to Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
• Rebar coupler on page 386
• Rebar end anchor on page 389
• Split rebar and add coupler on page 393
• Rebar end trimming on page 397
In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes on page 398
component.

Objects created
• Round parts
The parts are connected between two reinforcing bar groups.

Use for

Situation Description
Couplers with split reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 386 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Before you start
Couplers can be created between reinforcing bar groups or single reinforcing bars and
reinforcement meshes. The two selected reinforcement objects can be of different type and
they can even have different number of bars. The only requirement is that one or more bar
ends are in contact and parallel.

Selection order
1. Select the first bar or bar group.
2. Select the second bar or bar group.
Couplers are created at each location where
• the bar ends are parallel enough (angle < 5 degree) and
• the gap along the bar end is less than the length of the coupler and
• the offset perpendicular to the bar end legs is less than the diameter of the bars
When there is no valid and no parallel end-to-end location between the selected bars, the
component creates a dummy part that identifies the unsuccessful coupler insertion.
All couplers are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar. This allows
them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added to the sub-assembly of
the cast unit.
In some cases the reinforcing bars can move outside of the concrete. This may happen with
reinforcing bars that are modeled with two points (straight bars and straight bars with
hooks). If the reinforcing bars move outside of the concrete, change the cover thickness to
either a negative or a positive value depending on what is required.
Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar
Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra Fab. Length of
the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs.

See also
Rebar coupler: Parameters tab on page 387
Rebar coupler: Attributes tab on page 388

Rebar coupler: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define the coupler properties in Rebar coupler.

Option Description
Use manually entered values Enter values for the coupler properties.
Use auto attribute file The values in the auto attribute file override the coupler
component values.
Typically the auto attributes file contains one or more
attribute values to be used with certain bar sizes.

Reinforcement 387 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your
project.
For more information on the structure of the auto attribute
files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes
(UDAs) on page 399.

Option Description
Use custom component Select Yes to create the coupler as a custom part.
Select No to create the coupler as a normal part.
Name Type the name of the custom component, or select it from
the Applications and Components catalog.
Ensure that the selected component is a custom part.
Attribute Type the name of the attribute file of the custom
component.
The coupler custom part is created using the saved
attributes given here.
Input points The order of the start and the end points of the custom
component.

Option Description
Numbering series Prefix and a start number for the coupler part position
number.
Attributes Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the coupler
parts.
The overall end-to-end length of the coupler.
If you use a custom part, this is the length between the
start point and the end point of the custom part.
This is also the maximum gap between the bar ends. If the
gap is bigger than the length of the coupler, the coupler
cannot be inserted.

When you create the couplers as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series and
Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the
properties in a certain way. For an example, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) on page 399.

Rebar coupler: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Rebar coupler.

Reinforcement 388 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Threaded length The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The case
sensitive value field names are:
• CPLRThreadStart
• CPLRThreadEnd
The fields are used for checking which bars have threads and
what are the thread values so that they can be shown in
drawings and reports.
Extra fabrication length This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The case
sensitive value field names are:
• CPLROffsetStart
• CPLROffsetEnd
This value does not affect the length of the reinforcing bar. You
need to add this value in your drawings and reports to get the
correct length if required.
Method Additional UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.
Type You can set the reinforcing bar end method and the coupler
type, and add a product name and a code for reporting
Product
purposes.
Code
The used attribute name depends on which end of the
reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.

NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different
attribute values get different part marks.

Rebar end anchor

Rebar end anchor creates end anchors at the ends of reinforcing bars and bar groups.

Rebar end anchor is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and Anchor
Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
• Rebar coupler on page 386
• Rebar end anchor on page 389
• Split rebar and add coupler on page 393

Reinforcement 389 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Rebar end trimming on page 397
In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes on page 398
component.

Objects created
• Round parts
The parts are attached to the end of a reinforcing bar group.

Use for

Situation Description
Reinforcing bars with end anchors.

Selection order
1. Select the reinforcing bar or bar group.
2. Pick any point close to the bar end where you want to create the end anchors.
All end anchors are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar. This allows
them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added to the sub-assembly of
the cast unit.
Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar
Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra Fab. Length of
the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs.

See also
Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab on page 390
Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab on page 392

Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define the end anchor properties in Rebar end anchor.

Option Description
Use manually entered values Enter values for the end anchor properties.

Reinforcement 390 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Use auto attribute file The values in the auto attribute file override the end anchor
component values.
Typically the auto attributes file contains one or more
attribute values to be used with certain bar sizes.
Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your
project.
For more information on the structure of the auto attribute
files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes
(UDAs) on page 399.

Option Description
Use custom component Select Yes to create the end anchor as a custom part.
Select No to create the end anchor as a normal part.
Name Type the name of the custom component, or select it
from the Applications and Components catalog.
Ensure that the selected component is a custom part.
Attribute Type the name of the attribute file of the custom
component.
The end anchor custom part is created using the saved
attributes given here.
Input points The order of the start and the end points of the custom
component.

Option Description
Numbering series Prefix and a start number for the end anchor part
position number.
Attributes Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the end
anchor parts.
The dimensions of the end anchor.
If you use a custom part, define the length between
the start point and the end point of the custom part
using these values.

Reinforcement 391 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
The offset of the far most point of the coupler
measured from the physical end of the reinforcing bar.
Note that you cannot control the end of the
reinforcing bar with this component. You need to make
sure the end concrete cover of the reinforcing bar is
greater or equal to this offset plus the minimum
concrete cover.

When you create the end anchors as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series
and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the
properties in a certain way. For an example, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) on page 399.

Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Rebar end anchor.

Option Description
Threaded length The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The case
sensitive value field names are:
• CPLRThreadStart
• CPLRThreadEnd
The fields are used for checking which bars have threads and
what are the thread values so that they can be shown in
drawings and reports.
Extra fabrication length This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The case
sensitive value field names are:
• CPLROffsetStart
• CPLROffsetEnd
This value does not affect the length of the reinforcing bar. You
need to add this value in your drawings and reports to get the
correct length if required.
Method Additional UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.
Type You can set the reinforcing bar end method and the coupler
type, and add a product name and a code for reporting
Product
purposes.
Code
The used attribute name depends on which end of the
reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.

Reinforcement 392 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different
attribute values get different part marks.

Split rebar and add coupler

Split rebar and add coupler splits a reinforcing bar group and adds couplers in relation to
the direction of the picked points.

Split rebar and add coupler is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler
and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
• Rebar coupler on page 386
• Rebar end anchor on page 389
• Split rebar and add coupler on page 393
• Rebar end trimming on page 397
In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes on page 398
component.

Objects created
• Round parts
The parts are connected between two reinforcing bar groups.

Use for

Situation Description
Staggered couplers with split reinforcing
bars.

Selection order
1. Double-click Split rebar and add coupler to open the component properties.
2. Click Split rebar with coupler.

Reinforcement 393 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

3. Select the reinforcing bar or bar group to be split.
4. Pick the first split point.
5. Pick the second split point.
This point defines the line at which the reinforcing bar or bar group is split and couplers
are inserted.
6. Pick the third point.
This point defines the side of the main reinforcing bar or bar group. This is needed if you
have applied different properties for the first bar or group and the second bar or group.
7. Repeat the steps 3 - 6, or press Esc to cancel picking.
All couplers are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar. This allows
them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added to the sub-assembly of
the cast unit.
In some cases the reinforcing bars can move outside of the concrete. This may happen with
reinforcing bars that are modeled with two points (straight bars and straight bars with
hooks). If the reinforcing bars move outside of the concrete, change the cover thickness to
either a negative or a positive value depending on what is required.
Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar
Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra Fab. Length of
the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs.

See also
Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab on page 394
Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab on page 396

Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define the coupler properties in Split rebar and add coupler.

Option Description
Use manually entered values Enter values for the coupler properties.
Use auto attribute file The values in the auto attribute file override the coupler
component values.
Typically the auto attributes file contains one or more
attribute values to be used with certain bar sizes.
Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your
project.
For more information on the structure of the auto attribute
files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes
(UDAs) on page 399.

Reinforcement 394 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Use custom component Select Yes to create the coupler as a custom part.
Select No to create the coupler as a normal part.
Name Type the name of the custom component, or select it
from the Applications and Components catalog.
Ensure that the selected component is a custom part.
Attribute Type the name of the attribute file of the custom
component.
The coupler custom part is created using the saved
attributes given here.
Input points The order of the start and the end points of the custom
component.

Option Description
Numbering series Prefix and a start number for the coupler part position
number.
Attributes Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the
coupler parts.
Staggered type • None
Couplers are placed along the two picked points.
• Left
Couplers are placed to the left side of the two
picked points.
• Right
Couplers are placed to the right side of the two
picked points.
• Middle
Couplers are placed on both sides of the two
picked points.
The overall end-to-end length of the coupler.
If you use a custom part, this is the length between the
start point and end the point of the custom part.
This is also the maximum gap between the bar ends. If
the gap is bigger than the length of the coupler, the
coupler cannot be inserted.
Coupler position Location of the couplers in relation to the selected split
line.
If you select the Left or the Right option, the actual
left or right depends on the third input point which
defines the side of the first bar.

Reinforcement 395 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
This option is available only when there is no
staggering.
Example:

When you create the couplers as custom parts, the properties in the Numbering series and
Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you have named the
properties in a certain way. For an example, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs) on page 399.

Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Split rebar and add
coupler.

Option Description
Threaded length The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The case
sensitive value field names are:
• CPLRThreadStart
• CPLRThreadEnd
The fields are used for checking which bars have threads and
what are the thread values so that they can be shown in
drawings and reports.
Extra fabrication length This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA. The case
sensitive value field names are:
• CPLROffsetStart
• CPLROffsetEnd
This value does not affect the length of the reinforcing bar. You
need to add this value in your drawings and reports to get the
correct length if required.

Reinforcement 396 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Method Additional UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.
Type You can set the reinforcing bar end method, coupler type and
add a code for reporting purposes.
Code
The used attribute name depends on which end of the
reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.

NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different
attribute values get different part marks.

Rebar end trimming

Rebar end trimming adjusts the space between two reinforcing bar ends.

Rebar end trimming is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
• Rebar coupler on page 386
• Rebar end anchor on page 389
• Split rebar and add coupler on page 393
• Rebar end trimming on page 397
In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes on page 398
component.

Use for

Situation Description
Space between reinforcing bar ends.

Selection order
1. Select the couplers you want to modify.
2. Modify the properties.

Reinforcement 397 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

3. Click Apply to selected couplers.
OR
1. Modify the properties.
2. Click Select rebars.
3. Select the reinforcing bars whose ends are adjusted according to the value set for the
gap.

See also
Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends on page 398

Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends

Option Description
Get free gap from auto Select Yes if you want to use the gap defined in the Auto
attributes file attribute file for the couplers. When you select Yes, only
the coupler components that have the Use auto attribute
file in use are adjusted.
See Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined attributes
(UDAs) on page 399.
Select No if you want to manually enter the free gap.
The gap when Get free gap from auto attributes file is
set to No.

Trim both bars Select which of the reinforcing bars is modified.

Apply to selected couplers Select the couplers you want to modify and click the
Apply to selected couplers button to adjust the bars
according to the value set for the gap.
Select rebars Click the Select rebars button and select the reinforcing
bars whose ends you want to adjust according to the
value set for the gap.
The reinforcing bar ends need to be close to each other.

Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes

Use Update rebar attributes to manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the couplers
and the end anchor parts created by the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. With Update
rebar attributes you can check the current values of the selected reinforcing bars or all
reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 398 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Update rebar attributes is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
• Rebar coupler on page 386
• Rebar end anchor on page 389
• Split rebar and add coupler on page 393
• Rebar end trimming on page 397

If you have added coupler or end anchor components to reinforcing bars, the UDA values are
controlled by the coupler or the end anchor components and their properties. If you delete
the coupler or the end anchor component, the UDAs defined by those components are not
cleared automatically. Use Update rebar attributes to clear the obsolete attribute values.

Option Description
Selected The values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of the selected
reinforcing bars in the model.
All The values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of all reinforcing
bars in the model.
Update Deletes the values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of all
reinforcing bars on the selected rows.
Only the obsolete coupler UDAs of the reinforcing bar are
deleted.
You can select multiple rows by holding down Ctrl or Shift.
Show only rebar with Select this check box if you want to show only reinforcing bars
attributes that have values in their coupler or end anchor UDAs.
After you have selected the check box, click Selected or All to
refresh the table.

Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customizing attribute files, part

mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs)
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and
manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:

Reinforcement 399 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Rebar coupler on page 386
• Rebar end anchor on page 389
• Split rebar and add coupler on page 393
• Rebar end trimming on page 397
In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes on page 398
component.

Auto attribute files

The attribute table files are text files that can locate in any of the system folders, or in a
model folder. You can have as many attribute table files as you need. There are different
attribute tables for end anchors (one input reinforcing bar) and coupler components (two
input reinforcing bars). The extensions for attribute table files are
• .couplers.csv for Rebar coupler and Split rebar and add coupler components
• .anchors.csv for Rebar end anchor component.
The attribute table contains a header line, including the column names and one or more table
rows containing the attribute values. Columns are either selector columns or attribute
columns.
The selector column names are Primary.Size, Primary.Grade,
Secondary.Size, and Secondary.Grade.
The attribute columns contain the attribute value that is the name given in the header row.
The component attribute values given in the table row are used whenever the component
input (primary + secondary for Rebar coupler and secondary for Rebar end
anchor) matches with the selector values.
Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your project.

Custom part mapping

When you create the coupler or the end anchors as custom parts, the properties in the
Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part settings if you
have named the properties in a certain way. The following example shows the mapping
between the Numbering series and Attributes properties and the custom part properties.

Reinforcement 400 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

User-defined attributes (UDAs)
You can customize the content of the Attributes tab and the UDAs in the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools components.
The UDAs are defined in a text file named RebarCoupler.Udas.dat, located in
the ...\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\Environments
\Common\system folder. The file can also be placed in some other system folder or in a
firm folder. Note that the file is not read from the model folder.
The RebarCoupler.Udas.dat file only defines which UDAs are shown on the
Attributes tab. If you modify the file, include only existing UDAs to the file. If you want to
create new UDAs, ensure that you define them properly.

NOTE The UDAs affect numbering. Reinforcing bars with different attribute values get
different part marks.

Slab bars (18)

NOTE Alternatively, you can use the Mesh Bars and the Mesh Bars by Area components to create
reinforcement to concrete slabs or walls.
See Mesh Bars on page 373 and Mesh Bars by Area on page 378.

Creates reinforcement for a concrete slab.

Bars created
• Primary slab bars
• Crossing slab bars

Reinforcement 401 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use for

Situation More information

Slab bars (18) creates reinforcement for the
bottom or top surface of the slab, or for both. See
Slab reinforcement properties on page 403.

Before you start

• Create the concrete slab.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Slab bars (18) dialog box to define the properties of the
objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Concrete cover thickness, which Slab reinforcement properties
bars to create (bottom/top/both), on page 403
primary bar direction, which sides
are regarded as top and bottom
sides
Bottom bars Grade, size, spacing, and Slab reinforcement properties
generation type of bottom bars, on page 403
concrete cover thickness on slab
sides, crossing bar location in
relation to primary bars, end
hooks and bend lengths
Top bars Grade, size, spacing, and
generation type of top bars,
concrete cover thickness on slab

Reinforcement 402 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Tab Contents See also
sides, crossing bar location in
relation to primary bars, end
hooks and bend lengths
Attributes Numbering properties, name, and
class of bars

Picking order
1. Concrete slab

Slab reinforcement properties

Tekla Structures creates slab reinforcement using the properties in the Slab bars (18) dialog
box:

Field Description
Create bars Defines on which surface(s) to create bars. The options
are:
• Both sides
• Bottom side
• Top side
Primary bar The direction of primary bars. Use to change bar direction.
direction The options are:
• Use slab x direction
• Use slab y direction
• Use global x direction
• Use global y direction
Up direction Defines which sides are regarded as the top and bottom
sides of the slab.
Bar generation Defines whether Tekla Structures treats the bars as a
type group or a mesh.
Cross bar location Defines whether the crossing bars are located above or
below the primary bars.
End conditions The hook angles at bar ends. The options are Straight, 90,
135, and 180 degrees.
Bend lengths The bend lengths at bar ends.

Reinforcement 403 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Slab Reinforcement Tool
Slab Reinforcement Tool creates reinforcement to irregularly shaped concrete slabs. The
reinforcement is created as reinforcing bar groups. It is also possible to splice the reinforcing
bars.

Objects created
• Reinforcement

Use for

Situation Description
Slab with reinforcement

Before you start

Create a slab.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab).
2. Pick points to define the direction of the reinforcing bars.
3. If the area to be reinforced is set to By polygon, pick the polygon points to define the
reinforced area.

See also
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab on page 404
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab on page 406

Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the reinforcement properties, cover thickness, and
reinforcing bar spacing and area in the Slab Reinforcement Tool modeling tool.

Reinforcing bars

Option Description
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.

Reinforcement 404 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.
Name Define the name for the reinforcing bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.

Cover thickness

Option Description
Cover thickness Define the concrete cover thickness on the different sides of the
slab.
Depth Define the concrete cover, either from the top or from the
bottom of the slab.
Depth value Define the depth value for concrete cover thickness.

Spacing and area

Option Description
Spacing Method Define the reinforcing bar spacing method.
Number of Bars Define the number of reinforcing bars in a reinforcement.
Spacing Define the space between the reinforcing bars.
Adjustment Define how the reinforcing bars are placed in the slab.
The placing is based on the slab width and the cover thickness at
sides.
• Target spacing: The reinforcing bars are placed at even
spacing.
• Exact spacing cover at left/right side: The reinforcing bars
are placed starting from the left/right side.
• Exact spacing centered both covers: The reinforcing bars
are centered and at equal distance from the sides.
Area to be Reinforced Define the area to be reinforced in the slab.
• By part perimeter: The reinforcing bars are created in the
whole area of the slab.
• By polygon: The reinforcing bars are created to a picked
polygon shaped area in the slab.

Reinforcement 405 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab
Use the Advanced tab to control the reinforcing bar end hooks, splicing, and opening
properties in Slab Reinforcement Tool modeling tool.

Bar Ends

Option Description
Start/End Define the type of the hooks to be used at the
reinforcing bar ends.
If you select Custom Hook, you can define a custom
hook’s Angle, Radius and Length.
Angle Define the hook angle by entering a value between –
180 and +180 degrees.
Radius Define the internal bending radius of the hook.
Length Define the length of the straight part of the hook.

Splicing

Option Description
Splice Bars Define whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or not.
Maximum Length of Bar Define the maximum reinforcing bar length after which
the bars are spliced.
Splicing in Same Cross Section Define how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in the
same location.
• 1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same
cross section.
• 1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in the
same cross section.
• 1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the
same cross section.
• 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in the
same cross section.
Splicing Symmetry Define the symmetry that is applied when the
reinforcing bars are spliced.
• Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the
reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and the uneven
length is only at one side.
• Symmetrical with different lengths at sides: The
splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical
with uneven lengths at the sides.

Reinforcement 406 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
• Symmetrical with different length at center: The
splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is symmetrical
with uneven length in the center.
Splicing Offset Define the offset of the splice center point from the
point where the reinforcing bars originally met.
Minimum splitting distance Define the minimum longitudinal distance between
two splices in consecutive bars.
Splicing Type Define the type of the splice.
Lapping Length Define the length of the lapping connection.

Openings

Option Description
Cut Bars at Opening Define whether reinforcing bars are cut in slab openings.
Cover thickness for openings Define the concrete cover thickness on the sides of the
openings.
Minimum Size of Large Define the minimum size of an opening that is considered
Opening to be large.
This field is available if you set Cut Bars at Opening to At
Large Opening Only.

Beam reinforcement (63)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete beam.

Bars created
• Longitudinal main bars
• Corner and side bars
• Main stirrups
• Stirrups for one or two ledges

Reinforcement 407 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use for

Situation More information

Rectangular beams

L-shaped beams (RCL

profiles)

RCX profiles

Inverted T-beams (RCDL

profiles)

Before you start

• Create the concrete beam.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Reinforcement 408 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the properties
of the objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Parameters Concrete cover thickness, Beam reinforcement
number, size, and location of properties on page 409
bars, stirrup size, option to
place main bars only inside the
main stirrups or distributed to
the ledges
Stirrup Distances from the part ends Beam reinforcement
spacing to the first stirrups, number of (63): Stirrup spacing
spaces and spacing of main tab on page 410
and ledge stirrups in five zones
along the length of the part,
option to create different
stirrups in two ledges, ledge
stirrup spacing method
Advanced Grade, name, class, and
numbering properties of the
bottom, top, and side bars, and
main and ledge stirrups

Picking order
1. Concrete beam

Reinforcement 409 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Beam reinforcement properties
Use the following fields on the Parameters tab in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box
to define the beam reinforcement properties:

Main stirrup size

Size of corner bars

Ledge stirrup size

Number of bars

Size of bars

Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab

Use the Stirrup spacing tab in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define the
spacing of the beam stirrups.

Additional stirrup spacing type

Defines how the ledge stirrups are distributed along the length of the beam. The options are:

Reinforcement 410 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Target Tekla Structures creates equal spaces between the bars, aiming
the spacing value as closely as possible to the value you specify.
This is the default option.
Exact The first and last space of a zone adjust themselves to even out
bar distribution. The spaces in the middle of each zone are
exactly the size you specify.

Double tee reinforcement (64)

Creates prestressed strands and other reinforcement for a concrete double tee.

Bars created
• Prestressed strands in double tee ribs
• Stirrups in double tee ribs
• Reinforcement mesh on the top surface of the double tee

Use for

Situation
Straight strands
Different strand pattern and number of strands
When you use different stirrup shapes and spacings

Before you start

• Create the concrete double tee.
• Calculate the required area of strands and other reinforcement.

Reinforcement 411 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Double tee reinforcement (64) dialog box to define the
properties of the objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Parameters Concrete cover thickness, size, Double tee
number, and pattern of strands, reinforcement
stirrup size and type, size and properties on page 412
spacing of longitudinal and
crossing bars in the mesh
Stirrup Distances from the part ends
spacing to the first stirrups, number of
spaces and spacing of stirrups
in five zones along the length
of the part
Advanced Grade, name, class, and
numbering properties of the
strands, stirrups, and mesh
bars

Picking order
1. Concrete double tee

Double tee reinforcement properties

Strand pattern
Use the following options to define the strand pattern in double tee ribs:

Grid Staggered 1st Staggered 2nd

Stirrups
Use the following options to define the stirrups and stirrup hooks in double tees:

Reinforcement 412 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Example
Closed

Open

Open with 90
degree hooks

Open with 135

degree hooks

Open with 180

degree hooks

Reinforcement 413 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Beam end reinforcement (79)
Creates reinforcement for the end of a concrete beam or strip footing.

Bars created
• Horizontal U-shaped bars (types 1 and 2)
• Vertical U-shaped bars (types 3A and 3B)
• Oblique bar (type 4)
• Stirrups (types 5A and 5B)

Horizontal U bars (type 2)

Horizontal U bars (type 1)

Oblique bar (type 4)

Vertical U bars (type 3A)

Stirrups (type 5A)

Vertical U bars (type 3B)

Stirrups (type 5B)

Use for

Situation More information

Standard beams Use bars 3A and 5A for the beam end.
Dapped beams

Reinforcement 414 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Situation More information
Beams with anchor bolt hole in
the notched area
Beams and strip footings that
have a rectangular cross
section

Do not use for

Parts that have irregular cross sections.

Before you start

• Create the concrete beam or strip footing.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Beam end reinforcement (79) dialog box to define the
properties of the objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Concrete cover thickness,
distances from the concrete
surface to the bars, angle of
bar 4
Bars Bar dimensions of each bar Beam end reinforcing
type, which bars to create, bars on page 415
option to splice bars 3A and 3B
Groups Number and spacing of bars in
each group of bar types. If the
spacing varies, enter each
value individually.
In the Bar 4 list box, select Yes
to create the bar.
Attributes Grade, size, class, and
numbering properties of the
bars

Picking order
1. Select concrete beam or strip footing.
2. Pick position.

Reinforcement 415 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Beam end reinforcing bars
Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 on page 416
Vertical U bars 3A and 3B on page 416
Stirrups 5A and 5B on page 417

Horizontal U bars 1 and 2

Use the following options to create bars in the lower area of the beam end, in the horizontal
planes (bar type 1):

Option Description
Two bars on each plane. One in
the middle of the beam end,
the other extending to the
sides of the beam.

One bar on each plane,

extending to the sides of the
beam.

One bar on each plane, in the

middle of the beam end.

Two identical, overlapping bars

on each plane.

To create bars in the upper area of the beam end, around a hole, enter dimensions for bar 2.

Vertical U bars 3A and 3B

To create vertical U-shaped bars, enter dimensions for:
• Bar 3A: for the notched area of the beam.

Reinforcement 416 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Bar 3B: for the higher part of the beam.

Splicing bars 3
You can create vertical U bars (bar type 3) of two bars joined with a splice. To do this, use the
following list box on the Bars tab:

If you choose to splice bars, you can select the splice type:

Option Description
Lap up Creates a lap splice above the horizontal center
line of the beam end.
Lap down Creates a lap splice below the horizontal center
line of the beam end.
Lap both Creates a lap splice centered to the horizontal
center line of the beam end.
Coupler Creates a coupler.
Weld joint Creates a welded joint.

For lap splices, you can define the lap length L and whether the bars are on top of each other
or parallel to each other.
For all splice types, you can define the offset of the splice center point from the horizontal
center line of the beam end.

Stirrups 5A and 5B
To create stirrups for beam ends, enter dimensions for:
• Bar 5A: for the notched area of the beam.
• Bar 5B: for the higher part of the beam.

Corbel reinforcement (81)

Corbel reinforcement (81) creates reinforcement for one or two corbels in a concrete
column. The two corbels must have the same top level, thickness, and horizontal location.

Reinforcement 417 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Objects created
• Main bars
• Stirrups
• Additional bars

Use for

Situation Description
Two corbels, beveled and rounded,
with the same top level, thickness,
and horizontal location.
Two additional bars crossing each
other.

One straight corbel.

One additional bar.

Limitations
Do not use Corbel reinforcement (81) for two very different corbels.

Before you start

• Create the concrete column and beam(s).
• Create the corbel(s). Use Corbel connection (14) or a Seating connection to create the
corbel(s).

Reinforcement 418 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Selection order
1. Select the main part (concrete column).
2. Select the secondary part(s) (one or more corbels).
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement.

See also
Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab on page 419
Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs on page 420
Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab on page 421

Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab

Use the Main bars tab to control the main bar length, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties in Corbel reinforcement (81) modeling tool.

Option Description
Define the main bar length.
Define the distance from the concrete surface to the
main bar.

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Name Define a name for the main bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.

Reinforcement 419 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Class Use Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes
in different colors.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Option Description
Concrete cover Define the concrete cover thickness.
Number of bars Define the number of bars in the reinforcement.
Bar spacing Define the space between the reinforcing bars.

Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs

Use the Stirrups, Transverse Stirrups and Diagonal Stirrups tabs to control the stirrup
creation, stirrup type, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar
properties in the Corbel reinforcement (81) modeling tool.

Stirrups

Option Description
Stirrup location Define the distance from the concrete surface to the stirrups.
Number of bars Define the number of bars in the reinforcement.
Bar spacing Define the space between the reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name for the stirrups.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.

Stirrup type

Option Description
The stirrup consists of a bent single reinforcing bar.
Define the hook length.
The default values (for the standard 90 degree stirrup hook) are
read from the rebar_database.inp file.
Select a suitable overlap position for this stirrup type.
The stirrup consist of two overlapping U bars that face each other.
Define minimum and maximum overlapping length.

Reinforcement 420 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Concrete cover

Option Description
Thickness Define the concrete cover thickness.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Name Define a name for the stirrups.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Class Use Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.
Concrete Define whether the concrete cover thickness is same on all sides.
cover

Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab

Use the Additional bars tab to control the creation of additional bars in corbels, concrete
cover thickness, and additional bar properties in the Corbel reinforcement (81) modeling
tool.

Additional bars

Option Description
No additional bars.

One additional bar.

Two additional bars parallel to each other.

Two additional bars crossing each other.

Reinforcement 421 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Two pairs of additional bars crossing each other.

Option Description
Concrete cover Define the concrete cover thickness.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Name Define a name for the additional bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Class Use Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes
in different colors.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Round column reinforcement (82)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete column that has a round cross section.

Bars created
• Longitudinal main bars
• Stirrups
• Column end reinforcement

Use for

Situation More information

Main bars bent outside the column.
Continuous spiral stirrup.

Reinforcement 422 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Situation More information
Straight main bars protruding from the
column, or entirely inside the column.
Separate stirrups. End of column
reinforced.

Ends of column cut or fitted

Exact or variable stirrup
spacing

Do not use for

Rectangular columns.

Before you start

• Create the concrete column.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Round column reinforcement (82) dialog box to define the
properties of the objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Main bars Horizontal and vertical bond
lengths at the top and bottom
of the column, thickness of
concrete cover over stirrups
Number, rotation, grade, size,
class, name, and numbering
properties of the bars
Stirrups Thickness of concrete cover Column stirrup
over stirrups at the top and properties on page 424
bottom of the column, spacing
Group 1 is the top
and number of stirrups or turns
stirrup group, 5 is the
in each stirrup group, stirrup
bottom one. Group 3 is
types, overlap angle
always created.
Stirrup Grade, size, name, class, and
attributes numbering properties of each
stirrup group
Top Concrete cover thickness, Column top and
dimensions, rotation, number, bottom reinforcement
grade, size, class, name, and on page 425

Reinforcement 423 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Tab Contents See also
numbering properties of the
top reinforcement
Bottom Concrete cover thickness,
dimensions, rotation, number,
grade, size, class, name, and
numbering properties of the
bottom reinforcement

Picking order
1. Concrete column

Column stirrup properties

Use these options to define the stirrups in round and rectangular columns:

Option Description Applies to

Separate stirrups Round columns

Single, continuous spiral

stirrup

Separate spiral stirrups

Angle of stirrup overlap

Laps at stirrup corners Rectangular columns

135-degree hooks at bar
ends
Laps at stirrup corners
90-degree hooks at bar
ends

Use these options in the Bars/laps list box to define the spacing of stirrups:

Option Description
Exact space, flexible at Tekla Structures uses exactly the spacing
ends value you specify, and evens out the stirrup
distribution at the column ends.

Reinforcement 424 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Target space Tekla Structures creates the stirrups at even
spacings and tries to use the spacing value
you specify.
Distance list Tekla Structures creates the stirrups in the
middle stirrup group using the defined
spacing distances. Tekla Structures uses as
many distances from the distance list as
possible. The distances in the list may not all
fit within the middle stirrup group area so
that for example the last spacing distance
may be shorter than the distance value in
the list. The Distance list option is available
for rectangular columns.

Column top and bottom reinforcement

Use these options to define the rotation of the reinforcement at the top or bottom of
columns:

Option Description Applies to

No rotation. Rectangular columns
Transverse bars are
perpendicular to the longer
side of the column.
Rotation angle is 90 degrees.
Transverse bars are parallel to
the longer side of the column.
Rotation angle of the Round columns
reinforcement at the ends of
round columns.

Rectangular column reinforcement (83)

Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool creates reinforcement for a concrete
column that has a rectangular cross section.

Objects created
• Longitudinal main bars: corner bars (4), side bars
• Stirrups
• Intermediate links

Reinforcement 425 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Column end reinforcement

Use for

Situation Description
Rectangular concrete column with corner
bars and side bars bent outside the column.
Side bars on long sides. Intermediate links tie
side bars at every second stirrup.

Rectangular concrete column with straight

corner and side bars entirely inside the
column. End of column reinforced.

Limitations
Do not use for round columns.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (column).
The component is created automatically when the part is selected.

Reinforcement 426 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Part identification key

Part
1 Corner bars
2 Side bars
3 Stirrups
4 Intermediate links

See also
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab on page 428
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab on page 429

Reinforcement 427 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab on page 430
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab on page 431
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab on page 433
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab on page 435

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab

Use the Main bars tab to control the corner bar properties, the symmetry options, rotation,
and concrete cover thickness in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.

Basic corner bar properties

Define the grade, size and bending radius of the corner bars. The active fields depend on the
selected symmetry option.

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Bending radius Define the bending radius of the corner bars.

Define the concrete cover thickness.

Symmetry options

Select the symmetry option. Using the symmetrical conditions you can define which of the
corner bars have the same grade, size and bending radius properties. The corners bars that
have same properties are symmetrical.

Reinforcement 428 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Rotation

In square columns, you can select the perpendicular sides of a column if the sides require
different reinforcement. You can rotate all reinforcement in a square column by 90 degrees.

Additional corner bar properties

Option Description
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.
Name Define a name for the main bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab

Use the Bar ends tab to control the length of vertical and horizontal extensions for the
corner and side bars at the top and bottom of the column, and the cranking in the
Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.

Bar creation
Select whether the extensions of corner bars and side bars are created symmetrically on both
sides of the column. If you select Not symmetrical, you can enter separate extension values
for the opposite sides of the column.

Vertical extension
Define the length of the vertical extension outside the column for corner bars and side bars.
The active fields depend on the Bar creation options: Symmetrical or Not symmetrical.

Horizontal extension
Define the length of the horizontal extension for corner bars and side bars.
The active fields depend on the Bar creation options: Symmetrical or Not symmetrical.

Corner bar direction

Select how to rotate the bent corner bars.

Reinforcement 429 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Cranking
You can create cranked reinforcing bars at the top of the column.

In the Corner bar direction option list, select to activate the cranking options.
When you select this option, you can enter the horizontal distance dimensions for the
cranked bars.
To successfully create the cranked reinforcing bars, ensure that the bending radius is not too
large.
Define the distance from the column corner to the point where the cranking starts

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab

Use the Side bars tab to control the number of side bars, their spacing and placing,
symmetry options, and side bar properties in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83)
modeling tool.

Number of side bars

Define the number and spacing of side bars. You can define two sets of side bars on each side
of the column.
You can define the side bars separately for each side of the column.
The active fields depend on the selected symmetry option.

Placing of side bars

Select the horizontal and vertical placing for the side bars. Select whether the bars are
placed starting from the corner or at equal spaces.

Distance between corner bars and side bars.

Distance between side bars.

Reinforcement 430 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Symmetry options

Select the symmetry option. Using the symmetrical conditions you can define which side bars
are symmetrical, and which side bars use the same properties.

Side bar properties

Define the side bar properties for side bars 1 and side bars 2.

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Bending radius Define the bending radius of the side bars.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.
Name Define a name for the side bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab

Use the Stirrups tab to control the stirrup properties in the Rectangular column
reinforcement (83) modeling tool.

Stirrup dimensions

Reinforcement 431 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

1. Define the thickness of the concrete cover over the stirrups at the top and the bottom of
the column. The default cover thickness is 50 mm.
Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom stirrup group. Group 3 is always
created.
2. Define the spacing of stirrups in each stirrup group.
3. Define the number of stirrups in each stirrup group.
4. Select how the stirrups are distributed.
5. If you select the Distance list option, enter different spacing values for the groups.
6. Define the cover thickness for each stirrup group.

Bar lapping at stirrup corners

Select the how the bars lap at the stirrup corners. The options are 135-degree hooks at the
bar end or 90-degree hooks at the bar end.

Create as one group

Select whether all the stirrups are created as a single group. If you select Yes, all stirrup
groups are created and they have the same properties as Group 3.

Ignore cuts
If you have a recess or a hole in the column, you can select to ignore the cuts at the top and
bottom of the column when stirrups are created.

Stirrup properties

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Name Define a name for the stirrups.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.

Reinforcement 432 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab

Use the Intermediate links tab to control the intermediate links in order to tie all side bars in
the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.

If you have rectangular columns that have very large cross sections, the side bars may be a
far from the corners of the stirrups. You will need to create intermediate links to tie all side
bars, and to prevent them from buckling when they are in compression.
Intermediate links are created for each stirrup group.

NOTE Intermediate links are created between Side bars 1 or Side bars 2 that are
symmetrical.
For Side bars 2 intermediate links are created only if no Side bars 1 are created.

Properties of intermediate links

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Name Define a name for the stirrups.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Spacing of intermediate links

Spacing is the same as stirrup spacing.

Spacing is double the stirrup spacing (intermediate links at every second

stirrup).

Same as above, but for alternate stirrups.

No intermediate links are created.

Reinforcement 433 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Intermediate link type
Select the type of the link.

Intermediate link pattern

Select whether intermediate links go in one direction or in a crossing pattern.

Hook orientation
Select the hook orientation for both sides.

Closed stirrups as intermediate links

Select whether to use closed stirrups as intermediate links.
If you select Yes, select the type of the bar lapping at the stirrup corners.

Zone without intermediate links

Define the zone length where intermediate links are not created. In this zone the stirrups tie
the side bars. The distance is measured from the stirrup corner.
If you have selected the Yes option in Use closed stirrups always when possible, you can
define the distance from the corner of the closed stirrup.

Reinforcement 434 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab
Use the Top and Bottom tabs to control the top and bottom reinforcement thickness of
concrete cover, the number of bars and their spacing and rotation in the Rectangular
column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.

Number and spacing of top or bottom bars

Define the number and spacing of the top or bottom bars.
You can define the number of transverse bars in both cross directions.

Column top / bottom reinforcement

1. Define the concrete cover thickness.

2. Define the length of the ultimate leg.

Placing of top or bottom bars

Select the horizontal and vertical placing for the top or bottom bars. Select whether the bars
are placed starting from the corner or at equal spaces.

Distance between corner bars and side bars.

Distance between side bars.

Rotation
Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the top or bottom of columns.

No rotation.
Transverse bars are perpendicular to the longer side of the
column.

Reinforcement 435 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Rotation angle is 90 degrees.
Transverse bars are parallel to the longer side of the column.

Top and bottom reinforcement properties

Option Description
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Bending radius Define the bending radius of the top or bottom bars.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.
Name Define a name for the top or bottom bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)

Creates a hole in a concrete slab or wall and reinforcement around the hole.

Bars created
• Straight bars along hole edges
• Diagonal bars close to hole corners
• U-shaped edge bars

Reinforcement 436 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use for

Situation More information

Rectangular or round holes in
concrete slabs and walls
Straight and edge bars only, no
diagonal bars.

Diagonal and edge bars only, no

straight bars.

Hole rotated from the direction of

the slab.
One diagonal bar at each corner.

Different number of bars on each

side of the hole in the wall. No
diagonal bars.

Before you start

• Create the concrete slab or wall.

Reinforcement 437 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) dialog box to
define the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Shape of the hole (rectangular
or round):

Hole dimensions, bar

dimensions and location,
concrete cover thickness
Rotation angle of the hole:

Horizontal and Which bars are closest to the The slab or wall
vertical bars surface of the concrete direction defines the
(vertical or horizontal), number, direction of the hole
grade, size, numbering and which bars are to
properties, name, and class of the left and right of,
each bar group along the sides and above and below
of the hole the hole.
Edge bars Spacing, grade, size, numbering
properties, name, and class of
bar group on each side
Diagonal bars Number, grade, size, numbering
properties, name, and class of
bar group at each corner of the
hole

Picking order
1. Center of the hole
2. Concrete slab or wall

Reinforcement 438 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Hole creation and reinforcement (85)
Creates a hole in a concrete part and reinforcement around the hole.

Bars created
• Straight bars at hole edges
• Stirrups
• Z-shaped bars

Use for

Situation More information

Rectangular hole, stirrups on each
side of the hole, no Z-shaped bars.

Round hole, Z-shaped bars, no

stirrups around the hole.

Concrete beams or columns

Round or rectangular holes Hole only. No additional
reinforcement around it.
With or without Z-shaped bars or
stirrups

Do not use for

Parts that have round or irregular cross sections.

Before you start

• Create the concrete part.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.

Reinforcement 439 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hole creation and reinforcement (85) dialog box to define
the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Tab Contents See also

Picture Hole shape, direction, and Reinforcement around
dimensions, bar dimensions holes on page 440
and location, concrete cover
thickness, angle of Z-shaped
bars
Bars The number, grade, size, name,
class, and numbering
properties of:
• Straight bars above and
below the hole
• Z-shaped bars on the left
and right side of the hole
Stirrups Number, spacing, grade, size,
name, class, and numbering
properties of stirrups
Additional stirrup settings Stirrups at holes on
page 441

Picking order
1. Center of the hole
2. Concrete part

Reinforcement around holes

Use these options to create holes and additional reinforcement:

Option Description
Creates a hole and
additional reinforcement
around it.

Only creates a hole, no

reinforcement.

Use these options to define the direction of holes:

Reinforcement 440 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Hole along the local y
direction of the part.

Hole along the local z

direction of the part.

Use these options to define Z-shaped bars around round holes:

Option Description
Concrete cover
measured in the
direction of the radius of
the hole.
Concrete cover
measured from the
corner of the bounding
box around the hole.

Use these options to define the direction of Z-shaped bars:

Option Description

Stirrups at holes
Use these options to define the stirrups around holes:

Option Description
Single stirrups

Bundled stirrups

Reinforcement 441 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Hooks

Option Description
135-degree hooks

90-degree hooks

Braced girder (88)

Braced girder (88) creates braced girders in a precast concrete part, such as in a thin-shell
slab or in a sandwich wall panel. The girders are cast into the concrete part and they also
work as a part of the reinforcement and as a connector between the precast and cast-in-
place concrete.

Objects created
The girders consist of the following parts:
• Bottom reinforcing bars (2)
• Top reinforcing bar
• Connecting reinforcing bars (2)
Instead of using reinforcing bars, you can use profiles from the profile catalog to create the
braced girders.

Use for

Situation Description
Braced girders are created in the precast
concrete slab.

Reinforcement 442 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Situation Description
Braced girders are created in the precast
concrete sandwich panel.

Braced girders are created in a wide plate

floor with an opening.

Braced girders are created in a hollow wall.

Profile as a girder.

Reinforcement 443 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Selection order
1. Select the concrete part.
The girders are created automatically.

Part identification key

Part
1 Top reinforcing bar
2 Connecting reinforcing bar
3 Bottom reinforcing bar

See also
Braced girder (88): Picture tab on page 444
Braced girder (88): Parts tab on page 447
Braced girder (88): Geometry tab on page 457
Braced girder (88): Double wall tab on page 459

Braced girder (88): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the shape and dimensions of reinforcing bars in Braced girder
(88).

Reinforcement 444 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Reinforcing bar dimensions and shape

Description
1 Distance between the end of the top reinforcing bar and the part end.
2 Distance between the end of the connecting reinforcing bar and the part
end.
3 Distance between the end of the bottom reinforcing bar and the part end.
4 Radius of the connecting reinforcing bar.
5 Distance between bendings.

Define the distance between the bottom reinforcing bars, and the distance between the top
and bottom reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 445 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Reinforcement 446 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Reinforcing bar properties

Define the reinforcing bar properties for the top, bottom and the connecting reinforcing bars.

Option Description
Size Size of the reinforcing bar.
Grade Grade of the reinforcing bar.
Comment A comment, name, and class for the reinforcing bar, and a
prefix and a start number for the part position number.
Name
Class
Serie
Start number
Create Select whether the reinforcing bar in question is created or
not.

UDAs
You can define UDAs.

Braced girder (88): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the girder creation, positioning and number of girders in Braced
girder (88).

Reinforcement 447 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Girder creation

Option Description
Creation method Select the type of the girders.
Profile If you use a profile as a girder, select the profile from the
profile catalog.
In addition, define a prefix and a start number for the part
position number, a material and a name.

Workplane orientation

Option Description
Workplane position Select the work plane position.
Use the Position in plane, Rotation and Position in depth
options to define the orientation of the girder on the work
plane.

Girder position in z direction

Select how the girders are positioned in the z direction.

Reinforcement 448 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Geometry

Reinforcement 449 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Multiple L factor Define the accuracy for the rounding of the girder length.
The default value is 1.0. With the default value, there are no
decimals in the girder length.
Geometry Select the geometry for the connecting reinforcing bars.
Examples:

Reinforcement 450 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Girder position in y direction

Select how the girders are positioned in the y direction.

Examples

Reinforcement 451 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Extra girders

Select whether additional girder groups are created.

Examples
For example, if you have selected this option:

Reinforcement 452 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Extra girder groups is set to None: No additional girder groups are created between 2
existing braced girders.

Reinforcement 453 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By number: Additional girder groups are created based on the
entered number. Distances between the groups are equally divided.

Reinforcement 454 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By distance: The number of additional girder groups is based
on the defined distance. The distances between the girder groups are equally divided.

Girder group

Define whether additional girders are created from the existing girders.
Number is the number of girders in the girder group.
Distance list is the distance between the girders in the girder group.
e = is the position of the girders from the reference line.

Reinforcement 455 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
• Girder group is positioned middle of the reference line.
• Girder group is positioned on the right side of the
reference line.
• Girder group is positioned on the left side of the reference
line.

Examples
Existing
girders

Reinforcement 456 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Addition
al
girders

Braced girder (88): Geometry tab

Use the Geometry tab to control how openings and part length affect the girder creation in
Braced girder (88).

Option Description
Create always girders Select whether girders are always created.
If you select Yes, girders are created even
when the girder is placed fully outside the
concrete part.
Openings Select whether girders are created in
openings.

Reinforcement 457 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Length Select how girders adapt to the part shape.
Minimum length Define the minimum length of the girder.
Maximum length Define the maximum length of the girder.
The girder is split when the maximum length
is reached.

Examples of minimum length

No minimum length defined:

Reinforcement 458 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples of minimum length
Defined minimum length (no girder created):

Braced girder (88): Double wall tab

Use the Double wall tab to select how a second concrete element affects the girders in
Braced girder (88).

Look up sec concrete element

Select whether a second concrete element affects the creation of the girders. Define the class
of the second wall in the Class box.
Select the first wall, and if the second wall matches the defined class, a girder is created. You
can also enter a series of classes. You can use this creation method in combination with the
options defined for openings on the Geometry tab.
The example below shows a hollow wall where inside and outside shells have different
geometry.

Examples
A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry.
Look up second concrete element = No

Reinforcement 459 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry.
Look up second concrete element = Yes

Reinforcement 460 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Braced girder (89)

Braced girder (89) creates braced girders between selected points in a precast concrete part,
such as in a thin-shell slab or in a sandwich wall panel. The girders are cast into the concrete
part and they also work as a part of the reinforcement and as a connector between the
precast and cast-in-place concrete.

Objects created
The girders consist of the following parts:
• Bottom reinforcing bars (2)
• Top reinforcing bar
• Connecting reinforcing bars (2)
Instead of using reinforcing bars, you can use profiles from the profile catalog to create the
braced girders.

Reinforcement 461 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use for

Situation Description
Braced girders are created in the precast
concrete slab.

Braced girders are created in the precast

concrete sandwich panel.

Braced girders are created in a wide plate

floor with an opening.

Braced girders are created in a hollow wall.

Reinforcement 462 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Situation Description
Profile as a girder.

Selection order
1. Select the concrete part.
2. Pick the starting point of a girder.
3. Pick the end point of a girder.

Part identification key

Part
1 Top reinforcing bar
2 Connecting reinforcing bar
3 Bottom reinforcing bar

See also
Braced girder (89): Picture tab on page 463
Braced girder (89): Parts tab on page 466
Braced girder (89): Geometry tab on page 476
Braced girder (89): Double wall tab on page 478

Reinforcement 463 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Braced girder (89): Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to control the shape and dimensions of reinforcement bars in Braced
girder (89).

Reinforcing bar dimensions and shape

Description
1 Distance between the end of the top reinforcing bar and the picked point.
2 Distance between the end of the connecting reinforcing bar and the picked
point.
3 Distance between the end of the bottom reinforcing bar and the picked
point.
4 Radius of the connecting reinforcing bar.
5 Distance between bendings.

Define the distance between the bottom reinforcing bars, and the distance between the top
and bottom reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 464 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Reinforcement 465 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Reinforcing bar properties

Define the reinforcing bar properties for the top, bottom and the connecting reinforcing bars.

Option Description
Size Size of the reinforcing bar.
Grade Grade of the reinforcing bar.
Comment A comment, name, and class for the reinforcing bar, and a prefix and
a start number for the part position number.
Name
Class
Serie
Start number
Create Select whether the reinforcing bar in question is created or not.

UDAs
You can define UDAs.

Braced girder (89): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the girder creation, positioning and number of girders in Braced
girder (89).

Reinforcement 466 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Girder creation

Option Description
Creation method Select the type of the girders.
Profile If you use a profile as a girder, select the profile from the profile
catalog.
In addition, define a prefix and a start number for the part position
number, a material and a name.

Workplane orientation

Option Description
Workplane position Select the work plane position.
Use the Position in plane, Rotation and Position in depth options
to define the orientation of the girder on the work plane.

Girder position in z direction

Select how the girders are positioned in the z direction.

Reinforcement 467 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Example
Braced girders are positioned to picked points. The braced girders are related to the top side
of the part.

Geometry

Option Description
Multiple L factor Define the accuracy for the rounding of the girder length.
The default value is 1.0. With the default value, there are no
decimals in the girder length.
Geometry Select the geometry for the connecting reinforcing bars.
Examples:

Reinforcement 468 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Option Description

Reinforcement 469 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Girder position in y direction

Select how the girders are positioned in the y direction.

Examples

Reinforcement 470 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Extra girders

Select whether additional girder groups are created.

Examples
For example, if you have selected this option:

Reinforcement 471 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Extra girder groups is set to None: No additional girder groups are created between 2
existing braced girders.

Reinforcement 472 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By number: Additional girder groups are created based on the
entered number. Distances between the groups are equally divided.

Reinforcement 473 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By distance: The number of additional girder groups is based
on the defined distance. The distances between the girder groups are equally divided.

Girder group

Define whether additional girders are created from the existing girders.
Number is the number of girders in the girder group.
Distance list is the distance between the girders in the girder group.
e = is the position of the girders from the reference line.

Reinforcement 474 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
• Girder group is positioned middle of the reference line.
• Girder group is positioned on the right side of the reference
line.
• Girder group is positioned on the left side of the reference
line.

Examples
Existing
girders

Reinforcement 475 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples
Addition
al
girders

Braced girder (89): Geometry tab

Use the Geometry tab to control how openings and part length affect the girder creation in
Braced girder (89).

Option Description
Create always girders Select whether girders are always created.
If you select Yes, girders are created even
when the girder is placed fully outside the
concrete part.
Openings Select whether girders are created in
openings.

Reinforcement 476 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Length Select how girders adapt to the part shape.
Minimum length Define the minimum length of the girder.
Maximum length Define the maximum length of the girder.
The girder is split when the maximum length
is reached.

Examples of minimum length

No minimum length defined:

Reinforcement 477 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples of minimum length
Defined minimum length (no girder created):

Braced girder (89): Double wall tab

Use the Double wall tab to select how a second concrete element affects the girders in
Braced girder (89).

Look up sec concrete element

Select whether a second concrete element affects the creation of the girders. Define the class
of the second wall in the Class box.
Select the first wall, and if the second wall matches the defined class, a girder is created. You
can also enter a series of classes. You can use this creation method in combination with the
options defined for openings on the Geometry tab.
The example below shows a hollow wall where inside and outside shells have different
geometry.

Examples
A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry.
Look up second concrete element = No

Reinforcement 478 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry.
Look up second concrete element = Yes

Reinforcement 479 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Examples

Reinforcement mesh array in area (89)

Creates reinforcement meshes for an entire concrete part, or for a defined polygonal area.

Parts created
Reinforcement meshes.

Reinforcement 480 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use for

Situation Description
Array of overlapping rectangular
meshes.

Array of meshes in a polygonal

area that you define. Meshes
clipped to fit the defined area.

Before you start

• Create the concrete part.
• Set the work plane parallel to the plane where you want to create the mesh array.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) dialog box to define
the properties of the objects that the component creates.

Tab Contents See also

Picture Mesh catalog type, cover Mesh generation and
thickness and location, mesh overlapping properties
generation, cuts, mesh area on page 482
perimeter.
Overlapping Overlapping values, mesh Mesh generation and
offset values. overlapping properties
on page 482
Attributes Numbering properties, name,
and class of reinforcement
meshes.

Selection order
1. To attach the reinforcement mesh array:
• to the entire part, pick the starting point of the mesh

Reinforcement 481 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 • to a selected area, pick points to define the polygonal shape of the mesh
2. Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement mesh array.

Mesh generation and overlapping properties

Use the following properties to define how Tekla Structures creates the mesh array.

Picture tab

Property Options Description

Cover Define the mesh location and give values for Cover
thickness thickness on plane and Cover thickness from plane.
The default value for Cover thickness on plane is given.
Generation X Generation direction.
direction
Y To rotate the mesh generation direction around the
alignment point, enter an angle.
rotation
angle
Direction Same as Select Opposite of top layer to mirror the bottom layer.
of bottom top layer
layer
Opposite
of top
layer
Cut by Yes Select Yes to cut the mesh with the cuts made in the father
father part part.
No
cuts
Clipping Yes Select Yes to clip the meshes to fit the part or the selected
outside area.
No
Mesh area Polygon Select the outline which the mesh follows.
perimeter
Part The meshes in the examples are created by picking the
same points but with different mesh area perimeters.
Polygon +
Part

Reinforcement 482 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Property Options Description
example
Polygon

example
Part

Reinforcement 483 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Property Options Description
example
Polygon +
Part

Overlapping tab

Property Options Description

Overlapping Long side Define the minimum
and maximum overlap
• Min. overlapping
along the longitudinal
• Max. overlapping (Long Side) and
Short side crossing direction
(Short Side) of the
• Min. overlapping mesh.
• Max. overlapping The default values are
given.
Mesh offset Define how the meshes
are placed.
Mesh start offset 1/4 Define mesh start
offset for the first
1/3
mesh. The length of the
1/2 first mesh is divided by
2/3 the selected value.

3/4 For example, if you

select the Mesh start
Specified offset to be 1/4, the
Symmetric length of the first mesh
is divided by 1/4.
If you select Specified,
the Start length

Reinforcement 484 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Property Options Description
offset field becomes
visible and you can
give the offset for the
first mesh in the field.

See also
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) on page 480

Wall Panel Reinforcement

Wall Panel Reinforcement is used for detailing precast wall panels. It includes the
reinforcement for the panel edges, around the openings, a mesh for the whole panel and
additional bars, for example, with a wall shoe connection.

Objects created
• Reinforcement
• Stirrups
• Mesh

Use for

Situation Description
Wall panel with openings and reinforcement
in the panel edges and around openings.

Selection order
1. Select the concrete part to reinforce.
The reinforcement is created automatically.

See also
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Picture tab on page 486
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Reinforcement tab on page 487

Reinforcement 485 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Opening tab on page 488
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Diagonals tab on page 489
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Column tab on page 489
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Beam tab on page 490
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Additional tab on page 491
Wall Panel Reinforcement: Attributes tab on page 491

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to select how the corners of a wall panel are reinforced in the Wall
Panel Reinforcement modeling tool.

Option Description
Corner Select how the corners are reinforced
reinforcement and the bar is offset on both sides of
the corner.

Minimum Cuts smaller than this value are ignored and the reinforcing bars are not
breaking cut.
distance
Rebar count Creates a single layer of
reinforcement.

Creates two layers of

reinforcement.

Cover Distance from the edge of the wall panel to the side of the outermost bar.
thickness

Reinforcement 486 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Door minimal Cuts greater than this value are considered as door openings and the
height additional reinforcing bars that are needed, for example, in shoe
connections are not created.
Create Select whether horizontal or vertical reinforcing bars are on top.
stirrups
priority
Minimum The edge stirrups are not created if the dimension is less than the defined
edge length minimum value.

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Reinforcement tab

Use the Reinforcement tab to create the reinforcing bars around the wall panel edges in the
Wall Panel Reinforcement modeling tool.

Option Description
Wall panel Creates normal reinforcement.
edge
reinforcement
type

Reinforcement 487 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Creates U reinforcement.

Mesh Select whether a mesh is created for the whole panel.

If a mesh is created, you can define the mesh properties, or use custom
settings.
You can use the Mesh Bars component to create the mesh.
Horizontal Define the horizontal reinforcing bar properties for the wall panel edges.
reinforcing
Note that horizontal bars have three sets of properties, depending on the
bars
length of the bar.
For example, if the length of the main bar is less than 3000, it uses the first
field on left, if in between 3000 and 6000, the middle field and if greater
than 6000, the right field.

Vertical Define the vertical reinforcing bar properties for the wall panel edges.
reinforcing
Note that vertical bars have two sets of properties, depending on the
bars
length of the bar.
U Define the U reinforcing bar properties.
Reinforcemen
Each side of the wall panel has a separate set of U reinforcing bar
t
properties.

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Opening tab

Use the Opening tab to create the reinforcing bars around the wall panel opening in the
Wall Panel Reinforcement modeling tool.

Reinforcement 488 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Opening Can be set for all four opening edges.
reinforcement Creates normal reinforcement.
type

Creates U reinforcement.

Horizontal Define the horizontal reinforcing bar properties.

reinforcing
Note that horizontal bars have separate sets of properties for the top and
bars
the bottom bars.
Vertical Define the vertical reinforcing bar properties.
reinforcing
bars
U Define the U reinforcing bar properties.
Reinforcemen
Each side of the opening has a separate set of U reinforcing bar properties.
t

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Diagonals tab

Use the Diagonals tab to create diagonal reinforcing bars at the corners of the openings in
the Wall Panel Reinforcement modeling tool.

Option Description
Create diagonals Select whether diagonal reinforcing bars are created or not.
Diagonals count Number of diagonal reinforcing bars.
Size Select the diameter of a bar.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the bars.
Bending radius Define the bar bending radius.
L1 and L2 L1 + L2: Length of the diagonal reinforcing bars.
C Distance between the diagonal reinforcing bar and the corner of
the opening.

Reinforcement 489 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Column tab
Use the Column tab to a create column reinforcement in the Wall Panel Reinforcement
modeling tool.

Option Description
Column Column reinforcement is as high as the part.
reinforcement

Column reinforcement does not reach higher

than the top edge of opening.

Column reinforcement is approximately the L

value higher than opening edge.

Column Select whether column reinforcing bars are created or not.

reinforcement
• Minimum column height H: cuts and openings smaller than the
properties
minimum value are not taken into account in the column creation.
• Maximum column width B: if the width between two openings or cuts
or edges is greater than the maximum value, then the column
reinforcement is not created.
• Column height offset L1: distance between the column reinforcement
end and the opening edge.
• Column height offset L2: same as L1 but for the bottom part of
column reinforcement.
Main Define the main reinforcing bar properties.
reinforcing
Note that main bars have three sets of properties, depending on the width
bars
of the column.
Stirrup type Select the stirrup type.
Reinforcing Define the stirrup properties.
stirrups
Note that stirrups have three sets of properties, depending on the width of
the column.

Reinforcement 490 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Beam tab
Use the Beam tab to create a beam reinforcement on top of the opening in the Wall Panel
Reinforcement modeling tool.

Option Description
Beam reinforcement Select whether beam reinforcing bars are created or not.
properties
• Maximum beam height Hmax: distance from the top edge
of the wall to the top edge of the opening. If the height is
greater than the maximum, then the beam reinforcement is
not created.
• Minimum beam length Lmin: distance between the sides of
the opening. If the width of the opening is less than the
minimum, then the beam reinforcement is not created.
Top Define the beam top reinforcement properties.
Note that the reinforcing bars have two sets of properties,
depending on the length of the beam.
Bottom Define the beam bottom reinforcement properties.
Note that the reinforcing bars have two sets of properties,
depending on the length of the beam.
Stirrup type Select the stirrup type.
Reinforcing stirrups Define the stirrup properties.
Note that stirrups have two sets of properties, depending on the
length of the beam.

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Additional tab

Use the Additional tab to create additional horizontal and vertical reinforcing bars in the
Wall Panel Reinforcement modeling tool.

Option Description
Additional reinforcing Select whether additional reinforcing bars are created or not.
bars
Define the additional reinforcing bar properties.

Wall Panel Reinforcement: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the reinforcing bar properties of the created parts in the
Wall Panel Reinforcement modeling tool.

Option Description
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Reinforcement 491 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Name Define a name for the part.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number.

Multiple Wire Size Mesh

Multiple Wire Size Mesh creates reinforcement meshes with multiple reinforcing bar sizes.
The created reinforcement mesh is optimized for a mesh welding machine. Multiple Wire
Size Mesh can be used for slabs and wall panels. The slabs and wall panels can be of any
polygonal shape with any number of openings. The reinforcing bars in the mesh can be of
different size, and the spacings between the bars can vary.

Objects created
• Reinforcement meshes

Use for

Situation Description
Three zones of longitudinal reinforcing bars

Before you start

Create a polygon slab or a wall panel with any number of openings. Enter zone values to
define the width of the area to be reinforced in both the longitudinal and crossing directions.
Each direction can be divided up to five zones.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab or wall panel).
The reinforcement mesh is created.

See also
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab on page 493
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab on page 493
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab on page 494

Reinforcement 492 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns on page 495

Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab

Use the Mesh Parameters tab to control the mesh creation and cover thickness in the
Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.

Option Description
Define the concrete cover thickness.

Create Rebars Define to which side of the slab or the wall panel
the reinforcing bars are created.
Longitudinal Direction Define whether the x or the y direction is used as
the longitudinal direction when the reinforcing bars
are created.
By default, the x direction is the longitudinal
direction.

Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab

Use the Longitudinal Wires or the Crossing Wires tab to control the mesh creation in the
longitudinal or the crossing direction, and the reinforcement zones in the Multiple Wire Size
Mesh modeling tool.

Option Description
Wire sizes Define the sizes of the reinforcing bars used in the
pattern.
Separate the sizes with a space.
Min overhang Define the minimum length of the reinforcing bar
extension.
Max overhang Define the maximum length of the reinforcing bar
extension.
Min spacing Define the minimum space between the reinforcing
bars.
The value must be divisible by the grid size.
For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max spacing is
300 and the Grid size is 50, the spacings are 150,
200, 250 and 300.

Reinforcement 493 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Max spacing Define the maximum space between the reinforcing
bars.
The value must be divisible by the grid size.
For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max spacing is
300 and the Grid size is 50, the spacings are 150,
200, 250 and 300
Grid size Define the mesh grid size.
For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max spacing is
300 and the Grid size is 50, the spacings are 150,
200, 250 and 300.
This value depends on the welding machine.
Min wire length Define the minimum reinforcing bar length.
Min number of welding points Define the minimum number of crossing reinforcing bar
intersections.
Pattern width to fulfill Define the width of the pattern that is filled with the
mesh.
This value is used when the zone width is greater than
the given value.
Zone width value type Define the width of the area to be reinforced as a
percentage of the whole slab or wall panel width, or as
the actual length.
Width, Real width, Mesh area Define the mesh width, real width and area per length
per length in each zone.
Load pattern from file Select the external text file where you have defined the
patterns for longitudinal and crossing reinforcing bars.
If you use the external patterns file, Multiple Wire Size
Mesh tries to determine a pattern with a suitable area
per length value for every zone and apply these values
to the zones.

Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the reinforcement properties in the longitudinal and in the
crossing directions in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.

Option Description
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start Number Define a starting number for the part position number.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 494 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Name Define a name for the longitudinal and the crossing reinforcing
bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Class Use Class to group the longitudinal and the crossing
reinforcing bars.
For example, you can display the longitudinal and the crossing
reinforcing bars of different classes in different colors.

Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns
Use an external text file to define the patterns for longitudinal and crossing reinforcing bars
in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.

Every pattern starts from the Pattern line, followed by, for example, the pattern name. Each
Bar Size and Spacing pair is on a separate row. The Bar Size and Spacing values are
separated by a space.
The file has the following format:
< Pattern > < Name >
<Bar Size> <Spacing>
<Bar Size> <Spacing>
……………………………
<Bar Size> <Spacing>

Examples
Pattern 1
10 200
10 200
8 100
8 300
10 400
Pattern 2
10 200
10 200
8 100
8 100

Reinforcement 495 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8)
Embedded anchors (8) creates one or more embeds in a concrete part.

Objects created
• Embeds
• Thickening parts
• Reinforcing bars
• Hangup bars
• Crane cables

Use for

Situation Description
Two custom anchors.

Reinforcement 496 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Situation Description
Bolt anchors that are custom parts, hangup
bars and crane cables.

Cast-in lifting anchors that are custom parts.

Reinforcement 497 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Situation Description
Cast-in wire rope lifting hoops that are
custom parts.
Adjusting anchors are in the front side. The
component is applied two times.

Selection order
1. Select a concrete part.
2. Pick one point to position the embed.
You can also select multiple points, depending on how the embeds are divided.
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the embeds.

Reinforcement 498 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Part identification key

Part
1 Concrete part (wall, column, beam, slab)
2 Point
You can select multiple points.

See also
Embedded anchors (8): Input tab on page 500
Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab on page 503
Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab on page 509
Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab on page 511
Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab on page 515
Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab on page 519
Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab on page 520
Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab on page 521
Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab on page 523
Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab on page 525
Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab on page 528
Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab on page 531

Reinforcement 499 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab on page 533

Embedded anchors (8): Input tab

Use the Input tab to control the custom parts used for the embeds, the input points for
placing the embeds and the component direction properties in the Embedded anchors (8).

Input points sequence

Select the distribution method for the embeds. You can also adjust the placement of embeds
on the Placement tab.

Option Description
Select a concrete part and pick one position
point for the anchor.

Select a concrete part and pick multiple

position points for the anchors.

Select a concrete part and pick three points to

define the plane.
Pick a point to place the embed.

Select a concrete part and pick three points to

define the plane.
Pick multiple points to place the embeds.

Up direction
Define how the embeds are rotated.

Reinforcement 500 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

This option is not available if the three-point-plane option is selected from the Input points
sequence list.
You can use the global directions +X,-X,+Y,-Y,+Z,-Z.
Alternatively, you can use the local directions +X,-X,+Y,-Y,+Z,-Z to define a specific face of a
typical cube-shaped (slab, wall, beam of column) part.

-X local:

+X global:

Embed handling

Select whether the embed is handled as a detail or as a modeling tool.

In general, a detail uses the shape of the main part for positioning the embeds, and a
modeling tool uses the picked points for positioning the embeds.

Reinforcement 501 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embed offset
Define embed offsets in X- and/or Y-direction, from the picked position points.

Custom part
Select a custom part from the Application and Components catalog to be used as embed.
• Define the name of the custom component to be used for the embeds. If the embeds are
defined on the Picture tab, leave this box empty.
• Define the name of the configuration file for the custom component.
• Select whether the custom parts must be used for the embeds.
If set to Not, define the embeds’ shape on the Picture tab.
If set to Yes, define the connecting method. Use the Yes and subassembly option to add
the embed as a subassembly to the main part.
• Select how the embeds are rotated. The default direction is 2 point +x.
• Select how the embeds are rotated around a position point.

Reinforcement 502 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Positioning examples

Reinforcement 503 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab
Use the Placement tab to control the placing of the embeds, crane cable angles and safety
factor properties and to select the lifting anchors in the Embedded anchors (8).

You can define the input point sequence, lift system and embed dimensions both in reference
line and cross section direction.

Input points sequence

Select the distribution method of the embeds.
Use the a and b boxes on the right to enter the values.

Option Description
Embed is placed on a selected position point.

Embed is placed on a center of gravity (COG)

point in the part length direction.

Multiple embeds.
Define dimensions a and b.
Reference = COG
Define dimensions a and b.
Reference = COG
If embeds are likely to be placed outside the
part, then value d is used.
Define dimensions a and b as percentages of
the part length.
Reference = COG

Define dimension a as a percentage of the

part length.
Reference = COG
Define dimension a.
The right embed is calculated from COG.

Define dimension a as a percentage of the

total part length.
Reference = COG

Reinforcement 504 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Embed is placed in the middle of the part.

Define dimensions a and b.

Reference = middle of the part

Define dimensions a and b as percentages of

the part length.
Reference = middle of the part

Define dimensions a and b.

The distances are from the embeds to the
part ends.

Define dimensions a and b as percentages of

the part length.
The distances are from the embeds to the
part ends.
Three embeds in a triangular plate.
Define the vertical distance a from COG.

Three embeds in a triangular plate.

Define the vertical distance a from COG as a
percentage of the width b.

Lifting system

Select the crane cable lifting system.

Reinforcement 505 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Dimensions

Boxes for defining embed dimensions a and b, crane cable angle alpha and crane cable
height h.

Additional embeds
Define additional embeds. Use the boxes on the left and right to define distances. You can
enter multiple distances. Use a space to separate the values.
Use the middle box to define the number of additional embeds.

Mirroring

• Define the COG (center of gravity) for the selected parts, an assembly, or an assembly
without steel parts.
• Select whether embeds are mirrored.
Mirroring is useful for asymmetric custom part embeds. You can mirror both in reference
line direction and cross section direction.

Reinforcement 506 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Select whether both anchors are created, or only left or right anchor.

Lift.dat configuration file

You can use a configuration file to calculate the lifting capacities of lifting anchors.
Set Browse configuration file to Yes, and define the full path to the configuration file. The
default file is lift.dat, located in the profil folder.
The lift.dat configuration file contains a list of all custom lifting anchors belonging to
the default Tekla Structures installation. The anchors are sorted based on fabricator and type,
component name and lifting capacity. You can add more custom components to the list in
the configuration file. The file can be opened in any text editor, for example Notepad.

Reinforcement 507 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Type
Groups where lifting anchors can be selected.
• Type client
Description of types.
• Name CuCoPa
Name of custom component part as listed in the Applications and Components catalog.
• Lift force (kg)
Lifting capacity in kilograms.
• Dir
Direction. Component direction during creation of custom component part.
• Attribute file
Link to the configuration file.

Reinforcement 508 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

The anchor type can be selected from the list. The first list option corresponds to the first
type (1) in the lift.dat configuration file.
The last list option is All types and use preference list. This option searches from all groups.
A preference can be defined in the Preference type list. Start with the highest preference
group and separate the groups with a space.

Several fabricators have lifting anchors with the same lifting capacity, but with different
anchor lengths. Use the order in the configuration file to define which anchor is selected.
First found anchor with correct capacity = 1, second found anchor = 2, and so on.

NOTE If you have selected to use a custom part, ensure that the corresponding custom
parts are available in the model. Names of the custom parts should not contain
spaces, because they are not read from the lift.dat configuration file.

Safety factor
Define the safety factor. The weight to be lifted up is multiplied with this factor in the anchor
calculation.

Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab

Use the Top placement tab to define the embed offsets and how the information message
box and crane cables are shown in the Embedded anchors (8).

Reinforcement 509 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Offset
Define the embed offsets at both ends of the concrete part. An embed which is positioned
exactly in the middle of the concrete part stays in that position and does not get an offset.

Show information message boxes

Define whether a message box containing the embed calculation results is shown. The
message box shows the weight to be lifted up, the real lift-up weight including a safety
factor, and the selected anchor.
The message box appears only if you have set Browse Configuration File to Yes on the
Placement tab.

Show crane cables

Define whether crane cables are shown. If set to Yes, crane cables are shown as construction
lines or profiles with the alpha angle, defined on the Placement tab.

Reinforcement 510 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab
Use the Thickening tab to define the thickening of the concrete layer in the Embedded
anchors (8). The thickening is especially useful for sandwich walls where shells are thickened
near lifting anchors.

In the example below, a thickening is added with an extra insulation layer.

Reinforcement 511 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Thickening options
Select the side where thickening is applied. You can also define the thickness.

Option Description
No thickening.

Right side thickening.

Thickness is defined from center of the embed.

Right side thickening.

Thickness is defined from side of the embed.

Right side thickening.

Thickness is defined from side of the shell.

Left side thickening.

Thickness is defined from center of the embed.

Left side thickening.

Thickness is defined from side of the embed.

Left side thickening.

Thickness is defined from side of the shell.

Reinforcement 512 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Thickening on both sides.
Thickness is defined from center of the embed.

Thickening on both sides.

Thickness is defined from side of the embed.

Thickening on both sides.

Thickness is defined from side of the shell.

Thickening width and height

Select the thickening part reference, and define the thickening width and thickening height.

Option Description
Width is defined from center of the embed.
Height is defined from the top side of concrete.

Width is defined from center of the embed.

Height is defined from the bottom side of concrete shell.

Width is defined from the side of concrete shell.

Height is defined from the top side of concrete shell.

Width is defined from the side of concrete shell.

Height is defined from the bottom side of embed.

Reinforcement 513 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Side view
Option to combine multiple thickening parts into one if the distance between the thickenings
is smaller than or equal to the defined value.

Thickening part
Select how the thickening is connected to the shell. Define the thickening properties.

Additional insulation
Select how to add insulation to thickening part.

Reinforcement 514 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Insulation classes Define the class of the insulation which is used in the
concrete shell.
If the defined class number matches the class of the
insulation in the model, then the insulation will be cut at
the location of the thickening.
Foil classes Define the class of the insulation which is used in the
sandwich wall.
If the defined class number matches the class of the
insulation, then the insulation will be cut at the location of
the thickening
Create extra insulation Select whether an additional insulation layer is created.
Define the thickness of the insulation.

Additional options for the insulation part

Option Description
Extra insulation part Select whether the insulation part is added, and how it is added.
To Select the part to which the insulation part is added.

Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the embed dimensions, connection method and rotation in the
Embedded anchors (8).

Reinforcement 515 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embed dimensions
Define if the embed needs to be recessed. You can define the dimensions of the recess,
distance from the recess plane to the top of the embed and select the shape of the cutout.
Select the shape of the cutout.

Option Example
Circle

Square

Half moon x

Half moon y

As negative volume
Select whether cutout profiles are handled as empty cutouts or cutouts with a formwork
part.

Reinforcement 516 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Top part/Bottom part
Set the part class and rotation. Each option rotates the embed 90 degrees counterclockwise.
You can define also a fixed rotation angle.

Positioning
Select how to position the top and the bottom parts of the embed.

Option Example

Reinforcement 517 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Example

An example of an anchor that is positioned on top of the concrete part.

Reinforcement 518 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

How to connect top part to concrete element
Select whether the top part of embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is
connected to concrete part.

How to connect bottom part

Select whether the bottom part of embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is
connected to the concrete part.

Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab

Use the Top part tab to define the top part of the embed in the Embedded anchors (8).

Top part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the top part of the embed. You can
define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab.

Reinforcement 519 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Examples

Embed top part defined on the Top part tab, embed bottom part defined on the Bottom part
tab.

Reinforcement 520 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab
Use the Bottom part tab to define the bottom part of the embed in the Embedded anchors
(8).

Bottom part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the bottom part of the embed. You
can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab.

Reinforcement 521 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to define the embed top and bottom part properties and the formwork part
properties in the Embedded anchors (8).

Part properties
Both the top and the bottom part are build from multiple profiles. You can define profiles for
each section.
Define the part properties for the top, bottom and formwork part. If the profile properties are
left empty, the lengths and diameters defined on the Top Part and Bottom Part tabs are
used.

Option Description
t, b, h Part thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part position
number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name for the part.
Class Part class number.
Comment Add a comment for the part.

You can define UDAs for the top and bottom parts.

Reinforcement 522 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Reinforcement 523 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement
Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab
Use the Reinforcing bar tab to define additional reinforcing bars for the embeds in the
Embedded anchors (8).

You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile
properties in two directions.

Example

Grade, Size
The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade
and a size for bar A and bar B.

End conditions left / right

Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.

Reinforcement 524 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius
Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius.

Rotation
Select how to rotate the reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.

Dimensions
Define the reinforcing bar dimensions and the number of bars.

Reinforcement 525 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab
Use the Hangup bars tab to define additional reinforcing bars for the embeds in the
Embedded anchors (8).

You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile
properties.

Example

Grade, Size
The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade
and a size.

End conditions left / right

Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.

Reinforcement 526 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius
Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius.

Rotation
Select how to rotate the hangup reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.

Reinforcement 527 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Dimensions

Option Description Default

1 Select how to place the hangup
reinforcing bars.
Use the values a, b, c, d, e, f and the
angles alpha and beta to define the
dimensions of the hangup reinforcing
bars.
2 Define the number of hangup reinforcing 0
bars.
3 Define the cover thickness.
4 Define the distance between hangup 100 mm
reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 528 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab
Use the Horizontal bar tab to define additional horizontal reinforcing bars for the embeds in
the Embedded anchors (8).

You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile
properties.

Example

Grade, Size
The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade
and a size.

End conditions left / right

Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.

Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius

Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius.

Rotation
Select how to rotate the horizontal reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.

Reinforcement 529 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Side view
You can create sloped horizontal reinforcing bars. Define the number of bars and the distance
between them. Use value d to define cover thickness for the top side and value f to define
the reinforcing bar length.

Top view
Select a reinforcing bar shape.
Use values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the dimensions of the
horizontal reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement 530 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Reinforcement 531 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement
Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab
Use the Special bar tab to define additional U-shaped reinforcing bars for the embeds in the
Embedded anchors (8).

You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the reinforcing bar profile
properties in two directions.

Example

Grade, Size
The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog to select a grade
and a size for bar A and bar B.

Reinforcement 532 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

End conditions left / right
Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.

Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius

Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius.

Rotation
Select how to rotate the U-shaped reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.

Shape
Select a reinforcing bar shape.
Use the values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the dimensions of the
U-shaped reinforcing bars.

Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab

Use the Advanced tab to define UDAs and reinforcing bar properties for the reinforcing bars,
hangup bars, special bars and horizontal bars in the Embedded anchors (8).

Reinforcement 533 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Reinforcing bar properties

Option Description
Comment Add a comment for the reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number for the reinforcing bars.
Serie Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Embedded anchors (8): Bolts

Click the Bolts button to open a dialog box where you can define additional embeds and
embed offsets in the Embedded anchors (8).

Embedded anchors (8) uses only the Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist. options, the other
options are not taken into account.
Define the number of embeds and distances for Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist.. The
position points are defined on the Placement tab.

Reinforcement 534 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use the Sec/first option to define offsets.

With the options on the Placement tab it is possible to place a large number of embeds in
one go. For example, you can create anchors for connecting steel beams to a wall.

Reinforcement 535 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embed (1008)
Embed (1008) creates one or more embeds in concrete parts. You can create multiple
embeds to be used as lifting anchors with one insertion point.

Objects created
• Embeds
• Reinforcing bars

Reinforcement 536 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Use for

Situation Description
Embeds

Selection order
1. Select a concrete part.
2. Pick one point on the part face where you want to insert the embed.
The detail is created automatically when you pick the point.

See also
Embed (1008): Picture tab on page 537
Embed (1008): Top part tab on page 539
Embed (1008): Bottom part tab on page 540
Embed (1008): Parts tab on page 540
Embed (1008): Placement tab on page 541
Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab on page 543
Embed (1008): Advanced tab on page 543
Embed (1008): Bolts on page 544

Embed (1008): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the embed dimensions, connection method and rotation in
Embed (1008).

Embed dimensions
Define if the embed needs to be recessed. You can define the dimensions of the recess,
distance from the recess plane to the top of the embed, select the shape of the cutout and
whether the cutouts are handled as empty cutouts or cutouts with a formwork part.

Reinforcement 537 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Example
Circle

Half moon X

Square

Reinforcement 538 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Example
Half moon Y

Top part/Bottom part

Set the part class and rotation. Each option rotates the embed 90 degrees counterclockwise.
You can define also a fixed rotation angle.

How to connect top part to concrete element

Select whether the top part of the embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part is
connected to the concrete part.

How to connect bottom part

Select whether the bottom part of the embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how the part
is connected to the concrete part.

Select a custom part from the Applications and Components catalog

Select a custom part from the Applications and Components catalog to be used as embed.
Use the Yes and subassembly option to add the embed as a subassembly to the main part.
The default direction is 2 point +x.

Embed (1008): Top part tab

Use the Top part tab to define the top part of the embed in the Embed (1008) detail.

Top part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the top part of the embed. You can
define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab.

Examples
Embed top part defined on the Top part tab, embed bottom part defined on the Bottom part
tab.

Reinforcement 539 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Embed (1008): Bottom part tab
Use the Bottom part tab to define the bottom part of the embed in the Embed (1008)
detail.

Bottom part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the bottom part of the embed. You
can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the Parts tab.
For examples, see Embed (1008): Top part tab on page 539.

Embed (1008): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to define the embed top and bottom part profiles and the formwork part
properties in Embed (1008).

Part properties
Both the top and the bottom part are build from multiple profiles. You can define profiles for
each section.
Define the part properties for the top, bottom and formwork part. If the profile properties are
left empty, the lengths and diameters defined on the Top Part and Bottom Part tabs are
used.

Reinforcement 540 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
t, b, h Define the part thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part position
number.
Material Define the material grade.
Name Define a name for the part.
Comment Add a comment for the part.

You can define UDAs for the top and bottom parts.

Embed (1008): Placement tab

Use the Placement tab to define the embed placing, positioning and embed distribution in
the Embed (1008) detail.

Positioning
Select how to position the top and the bottom part of the embed.

Reinforcement 541 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Placing
Define the placing type of the embed. Depending on the component insertion points, multiple
embeds can be created.

Option Description
Embed is placed on a selected position point.

Embed is placed on a center of gravity (COG) point in

the part length direction.

Multiple embeds.
Define dimensions a and b.
Reference = COG
Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part
length.
Reference = COG

Embed is placed in the middle of the part, along the

length of the concrete part.

Multiple embeds.
Define dimension a as a percentage of the total part
length.
Reference = COG
Embed is placed in the middle of the part.

Define dimensions a and b.

Reference = middle of the part

Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part

length.
Reference = middle of the part

Reinforcement 542 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 Option Description
Define dimensions a and b.
The distances are from the embeds to the part ends.

Define dimensions a and b as percentages of the part

length.
The distances are from the embeds to the part ends.

Dimensions
Define embed dimensions a and b.

Center of gravity
Define concrete part COG (center of gravity) for the embeds.

Number of extra anchors

The spacing distance between multiple embeds.

Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab

Use the Reinforcing bar tab to define extra reinforcing bars for the embeds in the Embed
(1008) detail.

You can define the reinforcing bar shape properties, and the reinforcing bar profile properties
in two directions.
You can define the number, shape, dimension and covering thickness of the reinforcing bars.

Embed (1008): Advanced tab

Use the Advanced tab to define bar properties for reinforcing bars A and B in the Embed
(1008) detail.

Reinforcement 543 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Reinforcing bar properties

Option Description
Comment Add a comment for the reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number for the reinforcing bars.
Serie Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.

Embed (1008): Bolts

Click the Bolts button to open the Bolts dialog box where you can define extra embeds and
embed offsets in the Embed (1008) detail.

Embed (1008) uses only the Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist. options, the other options are
not taken into account.

Example
In the example below, the bolt placement uses fixed dimensions from part edges, defined on
the Placement tab. Extra embeds are defined in the Bolts dialog box.

Reinforcement 544 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Optionally, you can also use the Sec/first and Positioning options to define a distance from
the edge of the beam.

Reinforcement 545 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

Continuous Beam Reinforcement
You can reinforce a continuous beam using a macro called ContinuousBeamReinforcement.
The macro creates main top and bottom bars, stirrups, fittings, and additional top and bottom
bars using system components. Longitudinal reinforcement (70) creates the main and
additional top and bottom bars, Stirrup reinforcement (67) creates stirrups, and Battering
connection (13) creates fittings.

To reinforce a continuous beam:

1. Click the Applications and Components button in the upper-right corner of the
Tekla Structures main window to open the Applications and Components catalog.
2. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
3. Double-click ContinuousBeamReinforcement.
4. Select the beams and click Next.
5. Select the columns and click Next.

Reinforcement 546 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

 6. If needed, modify the reinforcement properties, and click Finish.
The reinforcements are created.

Limitations
The beams must be aligned for the reinforcing to be successful.

Example

2.3 Lifting
This section introduces components that can be used for lifting.
Click the links below to find out more:

Reinforcement 547 Lifting

• Lifting anchor (80) on page 548

Lifting anchor (80)

Creates two lifting anchors (or anchor groups) for a concrete part and places them
symmetrically on either side of the part’s center of gravity.

30% of part length (default)

Center of gravity

Objects created
• Lifting anchors (2 or more)
• Recesses for anchors (optional)

Use for

Situation More information

Straight anchor with
straight legs
(Type A in the anchor
properties file, see
Anchor properties from
file on page 552)

Straight anchor with L-

shaped legs
(Type D)

Reinforcement 548 Lifting

 Situation More information
Angle anchor with
straight legs
(Type B)

Angle anchor with L-

shaped legs
(Type C)

Custom components as
anchors

Anchors recessed into

the part.

Skew and/or rotated

anchors

Before you start

Create the concrete part.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box to define the properties of the
objects that this component creates:

Reinforcement 549 Lifting

 Tab Contents See also
Picture Anchor dimensions and Lifting anchor
locations, number and spacing properties on page
of anchors, option to use 550
custom components as
Custom components as
anchors, option to create
lifting anchors on page
recesses, recess dimensions,
551
skew angle of anchors, option
to rotate anchors, basic anchor Creating recesses for
properties lifting anchors on page
552

Picking order
1. Concrete part

Lifting anchor properties

The properties of lifting anchors are:

Field Description
Anchor dimensions The options are:
• Use dialog values
• Select from file, see Anchor properties
from file on page 552.
You need to enter different dimensions for
different anchor types.
The distance between an anchor (or anchor
group) and the center of gravity of the part.
Default is 30% of the part length.

The distance between an anchor (or group)

and the center line of the part.

Reinforcement 550 Lifting

 Field Description
Number of bars/ The number and spacing of anchors in a
spacings group. If the spacing varies, enter each value
individually.
Custom See Custom components as lifting anchors
Component on page 551.
Custom settings
Up direction
The option to define if the anchors are
recessed into the part. See Creating recesses
for lifting anchors on page 552.

The skew angle of anchors. Anchor heads are

skewed towards the part’s center of gravity.

Rotate anchor The option to rotate anchors. The options

are:
• No: Anchors parallel to the part.
• Yes: Anchors perpendicular to the part.
Side The side of the part where Tekla Structures
creates the anchors. The options are Front,
Top, Back, Below, Start end, and Finish end.
Grade, Size, Name,
Prefix, Start number,
Class

Custom components as lifting anchors

To use custom components as lifting anchors:
1. In the Custom list box, select Yes.
2. Click the ... button next to the Component field to open the Select component dialog
box.
3. Browse for the custom component you want to use as lifting anchor.
The component you select must be a custom part and have two or three input points.
The component should be created so that the first and the second input points are on the
concrete surface and along the longitudinal axis of the concrete part.

Reinforcement 551 Lifting

 TIP For more information on how to create custom parts that can be used as lifting
anchors, see Creating standard embeds for global use.

4. Select the component and click OK.

5. To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved properties file in
the Custom settings field.
6. If the anchor position is not correct, select another option in the Up direction list box.

Creating recesses for lifting anchors

Select one of the following options to define if the lifting anchors are recessed into the
concrete part:

Option Description
Anchors on the surface of the part.
(Default)

Anchors recessed into the part.

If you choose to recess the anchors into the part, use the following fields to define the shape
and dimensions of the recesses:

Anchor properties from file

You can define lifting anchor properties by entering values in the dialog box (see Lifting
anchor properties on page 550), or you can create a file containing the anchor properties you

Reinforcement 552 Lifting

want to use. Use any standard text editor to create the file and save it as
LiftingAnchors.dat in the model folder.
To use the anchor properties you define in a file:
1. In the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box, select Select from file from the Anchor
dimensions list box.
2. Click the ... button to browse for the file.

Example
Create a row in the file for each lifting anchor. Enter the following properties, separated by
spaces:
• Anchor capacity [kN], including safety and material factors
• Type [A, B, C, or D], see the Use for table in Lifting anchor (80) on page 548
• Grade [characters]
• Size [characters]
• Anchoring length 1 [mm]
• Anchoring length 2 [mm]
• Protruding dimension of the anchor outside the part [mm]
• Penetrating dimension of the anchor inside the part [mm]
• Bending radius [mm]
• Hook length [mm] (0 = no hook)
• Angle of leg 1 [degrees]
• Angle of leg 2 [degrees]
Here is an example of a lifting anchor file (Tekla Structures ignores the comments enclosed
in /* */):

Tekla Structures will use the first anchor in the file that:
1. Has the shape and type you define using the graphic list boxes in the Lifting anchor
(80) dialog box.

Reinforcement 553 Lifting

2. Can carry the part’s weight with other identical anchors. The total number of anchors is
two times the number you specify in the Number of bars field.

Reinforcement 554 Lifting

3 Disclaimer

© 2015 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.

This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the
Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among
other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this
Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the
Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All
information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License
Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable
limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not guarantee that the text is free of
technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make changes and
additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any
portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla BIMsight, BIMsight, Tedds, Solve, Fastrak and Orion are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United
States, and/or other countries. More about Tekla trademarks: http://www.tekla.com/tekla-
trademarks. Trimble is a registered trademark or trademark of Trimble Navigation Limited in
the European Union, in the United States and/or other countries. More about Trimble
trademarks: http://www.trimble.com/trademarks.aspx. Other product and company names
mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring
to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or
endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except
where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2010 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
Open CASCADE Technology © 2001-2014 Open CASCADE SA. All rights reserved.
FLY SDK - CAD SDK © 2012 VisualIntegrity™. All rights reserved.
Teigha © 2003-2014 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer 555 Lifting

PolyBoolean C++ Library © 2001-2012 Complex A5 Co. Ltd. All rights reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2014 Flexera Software LLC. All Rights Reserved.
This product contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative
works owned by Flexera Software LLC and its licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication,
distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in
any form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Flexera Software
LLC is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software LLC in writing,
possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any
Flexera Software LLC intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or
otherwise.
To see the third party licenses, go to Tekla Structures, click Help --> About and click the
Third party licenses button.
The elements of the software described in this Manual are protected by several patents and
possibly pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries. For more
information go to page http://www.tekla.com/tekla-patents.

Disclaimer 556 Lifting

Index

A Corbel connection (14).................................................... 23

Corbel reinforcement (81)............................................ 417
Automatic seam recognition (30).............................. 226 corbels
chamfering.................................................................. 12
custom components
B as lifting anchors.....................................................551

battering connection (13)...............................................21

beam end reinforcement (79)......................................413
beam ends D
concrete components 76, 78..................................16 double tee reinforcement (64).....................................411
beam reinforcement (63)..............................................407
bearing plate
concrete components 75, 76..................................14
bolt hole dimensions in concrete components......... 11
E
Electric box in wall (84)................................................128
elevator shaft...................................................................302
C Embed (1008)...................................................................536

cast-in-place....................................................................546
cast-in-situ.......................................................................546
CIP.......................................................................................546
F
column reinforcement fitting options
round columns (82)................................................ 422 concrete component 75...........................................12
stirrups....................................................................... 424 concrete component 76...........................................16
top and bottom........................................................425 Floor Layout......................................................................261
Concrete beam-beam (112)............................................66 Floor Layout CIP Filler................................................... 284
concrete components......................................................... 9 Floor Tool...........................................................................257
stairs (7).....................................................................285 flooring decks...................................................................230
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90).................... 302
concrete detailing................................................................9
concrete slab G
generation with points (62)................................. 233 grout
generation with polygon plate (61)................... 230 concrete components 75, 76..................................12
Concrete stairs (65)........................................................287
concrete stairs
about...........................................................................284
properties.......................................................... 286,304 H
connections Hole Generation (32)..................................................... 222
seating (concrete)........................................................ 9 hole reinforcement
continuous beam creation and reinforcement (85)........................ 438
reinforcing.................................................................546 for slabs and walls (84)......................................... 436

557
Hollow Core Lifting Loops............................................ 253 Slab Reinforcement Tool...............................................403
Hollow Core Opening Tool............................................249 slab
properties...................................................................231
type............................................................................. 232
L slabs....................................................................................230
Sloping slab drainage.................................................... 246
lacer bars in footings.....................................................367 stairs, concrete
lifting anchor (80).......................................................... 548 properties.......................................................... 286,304
stairs
concrete.............................................................285,302
M stairwell.............................................................................302
mesh bars..........................................................................373 starter bars (86, 87)....................................................... 370
mesh bars by area...........................................................378 strip footing reinforcement (75).................................361
Modeling of floor bay (66)........................................... 235
Modeling of slab area (88)...........................................244
Multiple Wire Size Mesh ............................................. 492 T
tolerances
in concrete stairs.....................................................286
P two-sided seating with dowel (76)..............................14
pad footing reinforcement (77)..................................368 two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78)........... 19
panels.................................................................................230
pile cap reinforcement (76)......................................... 363
Polygon Hole Generation (33).....................................225
Polygon Hole Generation (33) parameters.............. 225

R
recess nut and washer plate
concrete components 75, 76..................................13
concrete components 77, 78..................................19
Reinforced concrete stair (95).................................... 306
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89)....................480
reinforcement
for foundations........................................................ 361
reinforcing
continuous beam.....................................................546
round column reinforcement (82)............................. 422

S
Seam Applicator..............................................................228
seating connections............................................................9
seating with dowel (75).................................................. 10
seating with dowel to flange (77)................................17
slab generation with points (62)................................233
slab generation with polygon plate (61)..................230

558